Home

2009 GMC Envoy Owners Manual

1. eeeeeeeeeeee eee eeee ees 3 44 Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light 3 44 Check Gages Warning Light eeeeeeees 3 45 Gate Ajar Light sssi ndenann e anis aisi 3 45 Fuel Gage scsi wacercsswedsnes sth aenea aee iaai 3 46 Low Fuel Warning Light n 3 47 Check Gas Cap Light 35 aner ede ss iniiis 3 47 Driver Information Center DIC 1 1 1 1 1 3 47 DIC Operation and Displays c ceeeeeeeees 3 48 DIC Warnings and Messages 0eeeeeeeee ees 3 51 DIC Vehicle Customization ceeeeeeeee eres 3 56 Audio System s cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee rener 3 62 Setting the Clock ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaes 3 63 Radio S ice aen Aaa aa ES EAE b 3 64 Using an MPS 2335 er koina eoa 3 80 XM Radio Messages 2MMG G ss ssseseserereeer ener r enn rrerer 3 84 Navigation Radio System 3 86 Bluetooth 22 cesicecccuscedvssteataredasncsusaduinauseedtecse 3 86 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System 3 96 Rear Seat Audio RSA ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 109 Theft Deterrent Feature a an 3 110 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 2655 3 110 Radio Reception secrecion teann 3 111 Fixed Mast Antenna seeen 3 112 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 112 Chime Level Adjustment c eeeeeeeeee ees 3 112 NOTES 3 3 Instrument Panel Overview oe Ey DE 3 4
2. 0 5 113 Rear Underseat Fuse Block 0 eeeeeeeee 5 116 Capacities and Specifications 5 120 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer You will receive genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco ig Parts EF Goodwrench ME Accessories Accessories and Modifications When non dealer non retailer accessories are added to the vehicle they can affect vehicle performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 69 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other r
3. W ssseeeeeerereeeere re eeaes 3 26 REAP aE he DRE mile 3 26 Clock Setting Er arrede 3 63 Collision Damage Repair W u dsseeeeeeererererree 7 11 COMPASS ereinen irin a eae ie ad 2 40 Compressor Kit SIOMING 222 ark EE 5 87 Compressor Kit Tire Sealant 2 5 77 Content Theft Deterrent c eceeeeeeeeeee tees 2 16 Control of a Vehicle ccccceececneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 3 Convenience Net scceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeees 2 54 Coolant ENGINE edera a a EEA 5 25 Engine Temperature Gage eeeeeeeeneee ees 3 37 Cooling SYSTEM fees decesnwedcontly dues neh tener RSS RS 5 24 Cruise Control esnie eneki enar aane En 3 10 Cruise Control Light c esenonersnseninneinnant 3 43 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation ccceeeeeeneeeeeneees 7 10 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users n c 7 6 Customer Assistance Offices 0 eeeees 7 6 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 5 7 2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 7 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 7 15 Customer Assistance Information cont Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ssseevererereere 7 15 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government n 7 14 Roadside Assistance Program ceecee 7 7 Service Publications Ordering Information 7 15 Daytime Running Lamp c ceeeeee
4. 5 10 Chemical Paint Spotting cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 110 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeee tenes 1 39 Infants and Young Children eeeeeeeeee 1 35 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 43 Older Children vecsecs sseecedises ei eevee ets 1 32 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position 1 49 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position eeeee 1 51 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 1 52 Where to Put the Restraint c eee 1 42 Chime Level Adjustment eeeeeeeeeee ees 3 112 Cigarette Lighter cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eee eene 3 19 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels oinotek enderne 5 109 Exterior Lamps Lenses W u u u dssseeeeeeresr sner senen 5 107 Fabric Carpet rr sis ren eee 5 104 Finish Care 222 bebos bredere 5 108 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces cieune antiin 5 106 MELOT sesenta eiiis saad e 5 103 Leather 5 in i bob dads cas pennan a 5 105 WHMCS iesea E A EEE 5 109 Underbody Maintenance accccccrcceccenee 5 110 Washing Your Vehicle ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee 5 107 WeatherStripS cceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 106 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 108 Climate Control System Dal FREE a E Eee E 3 19 Dual Automati eieiei edie deg 3 22 Outlet Adjustment
5. Geta smooth start up the hill and try to maintain speed Not using more power than needed can avoid spinning the wheels or sliding A CAUTION Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path such as boulders trees logs or ruts What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you do not know It is the smart way to Turning or driving across steep hills can be find out dangerous You could lose traction slide Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have sideways and possibly roll over You could be ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because seriously injured or killed When driving up hills they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion always try to go straight up Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you are there Use headlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic A CAUTION Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There cou
6. 4 31 Routing Engine Drive Belt cece 6 15 Running the Vehicle While Parked 5 2 38 Safety Belt Reminders ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 30 Safety Belts GALS Of ebe eee deals 5 106 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 18 Lap Shoulder Belt cc eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 27 Safety Belt Extender c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 32 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 31 Safety Belts Are for Everyone 1 13 Safety Warnings and Symbols 0 0 eeeeeeees iii Scheduled Maintenance ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 4 Seats Head Restraints sc rage eres renee 1 10 Heated Seats siiririedisemi iita riad i 1 4 Manual Lumbar s mostara asennan 1 3 MEMON rirorio noraen aeai SE 1 5 Power Lumbal 2 2istsaclsseteslc teen aan lle aN 1 4 Power Seat 352 eng citna jonai 1 3 Rear Seat Operation ssssseeeerererrnrere 1 11 Reclining Seatbacks W W u sssssereeeerere renere nnee 1 7 Secondary Latch System W ssseeeeeererrnerree 5 97 Securing a Child Restraint Center Rear Seat Position e eeeeeeeeee ee 1 51 Rear Outside Seat Position eeeeeeeees 1 49 Right Front Seat Position 0 ee 1 52 Security Hight serrin neinte ann rinine 3 43 SGIVICE 5 iir ine PE EEEa EE EEE E A EES 5 3 Accessories and Modifications s ssssre 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of
7. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank See Cooling System on page 5 24 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 20 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 34 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 21 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Radiator Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 5 24 Remote Negative Terminal Marked GND See Jump Starting on page 5 39 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 33 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 35 Engine Compartment Fuse Block See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5 113 Battery See Battery on page 5 38 Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the
8. N id Liftgate Module 2 06 jk S oa Passenger Door Control Module Driver Door Control Module 5 117 rs Te p05 foarser 00 ear Winer SS Driver Side Rear Parking Lamps 16 Vehicle Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL 17 Passenger Side Rear Parking Lamps 19 Liftgate Module Driver Seat Module 5 118 Fuses O Ue Battery OnStar System Truck Body Controller Accessory Truck Body Controller 5 Front Wipers Vehicle Stop Transmission Control Module 36 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B Driver Side Turn Signal Auxiliary Power 1 39 Heat Ventilation Air Ignition 0 Conditioning 1 i Four Wheel Drive Truck Body Controller 4 Truck Body Controller Ignition Passenger Side Turn Signal Truck Body Controller Run Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning 5 119 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information NE Er English Metric For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer retailer for more information Cooling System Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 5 120 al Fuel Tank 22 0 gal 83 3 L Transfer Case Lubricant 2 0 qt Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill 5 0 qt Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 Nem All capacities are approximate
9. This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the driver s safety belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on 3 30 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 64 for more information The passenger safety belt light located on the instrument panel comes on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion 2 If the passenger safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device To turn off the warning light and or chime remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag s electrical system for possible malfunctions If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system
10. 2 41 Outside Power Mirrors Vehicles with outside power mirrors have controls located on the driver door To adjust the mirrors 1 Turn the control knob left or right to select the driver s or passenger mirror 2 Move the control knob to the left or right or up or down to position the mirror to see a little of the outside of the vehicle 3 After adjusting the position of the mirrors turn the knob to the center off position so that the mirrors do not move If the end of travel position in any direction of the mirror is reached it will enter a ratcheting mode This action is harmless It is a warning that the mirror can go no further To stop this action back the mirror up by moving the knob in the opposite direction Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold push the mirrors toward the vehicle To return the mirrors to their original position push outward 2 42 Outside Convex Mirror A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on the right Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger side mirror is convex shaped A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat Outside Heated Mirrors G3 Rear Window Defogger Press to heat the mirrors
11. Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Vehicles with an automatic transmissions can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions Three important considerations have to do with weight The weight of the trailer The weight of the trailer tongue The weight on the vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how the rig is used For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the ma
12. The main components of the instrument panel are the following A Headlamps on page 3 13 Dome Lamp Override L Transfer Case Controls See Automatic Transfer on page 3 16 Instrument Panel Brightness on Case under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 page 3 16 Fog Lamps on page 3 15 If Equipped M Shift Lever and StabiliTrak If Equipped Button B Outlet Adjustment on page 3 26 See Shifting Into Park on page 2 34 and StabiliTrak C Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 7 System on page 4 6 D OnStar and Audio Steering Wheel Controls N Lighter See Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter on See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 110 page 3 19 E Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3 28 O Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 18 F Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 110 P Parking Brake on page 2 33 G Ignition Positions on page 2 21 Q Rear Window Washer Wiper See Windshield i Washer on page 3 9 H Audio System s on page 3 62 i i Dual Climate Control Syst 3 19 R Rear Window Defogger See Dual Climate Control aamua ale MODNO OYSIEM ON page SETS System on page 3 19 and Dual Automatic Climate J Hood Release on page 5 11 Control System on page 3 22 K Driver Information Center DIC Steering Wheel S Glove Box on page 2 51 Controls See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 47 Hazard Warning Flashers A Hazard Warning Flasher Press this button located on top of the steering column to make th
13. To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C 5 22 Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it is colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in 3 Third until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it is colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Fluid Level Prepare the vehicle as follows 1 Park the vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running 2 With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in P Park 3 With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in P Park 4 Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps 1 Flip the handle up and then remove the dipstick and wipe it with a cl
14. 2 Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the trim panel 3 Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate 4 Reinstall the trim plug Windows ACAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 2 13 Power Windows A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows The controls for the power windows are located on the armrest on each of the side doors With power windows the switches operate the windows when the ignition is in ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 22 The driver s door also has a switch for each of the
15. Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include ACAUTION Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling system and transmission Going down steep or long hills shift to a lower gear lf you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope ACAUTION Coasting downhill in N Neutral or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action See Off Road Driving on page 4 13 for information about driving off road 4 27 Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully w
16. Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps come on when you remove the key from the ignition If the dome override is off these lamps stay on for a short period of time and then go out Reading Lamps The reading lamps are located in the front console Press the lens on the lamps to turn the reading lamps on or off Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on such as headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and
17. Notice The chime signals related to safety belts parking brake and other functions of your vehicle operate through the radio entertainment system If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added to your vehicle the chimes may not work Make sure that replacement or additional equipment is compatible with your vehicle before installing it See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 22 for more information Setting the Clock The clock can be set with the ignition on or off The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour displays AM or PM displays for morning or evening hours Press and hold the minute button until the correct minute displays To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System RDS information press and hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until UPDATED and the clock symbol appear on the display If the time is not available from the station NO UPDATE or NO UPDAT will appear on the display RDS time is broadcast once a minute After tuning to an RDS broadcast station it could take a few minutes for the time to update 3 63 Radio s Gh 2 GLA GILE
18. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise Attach the sealant air hose F onto the tire valve stem Turn it clockwise until it is tight Plug the power plug H into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 18 If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet do not use the cigarette lighter If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter use the cigarette lighter Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window 7 8 Start the vehicle The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor Turn the selector switch A counterclockwise to the Sealant Air position Press the on off B button to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on The compressor will inject sealant and air into the tire The pressure gage C will initially show a high pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant into the tire Once the sealant is completely dispersed into the tire the pressure will quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only 5 81 10 Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gage C The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 The pressure gage C may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is
19. The cruise controls are located on the end of the y turn signal multifunction A CAUTION lever If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control O Off Turns the cruise control system off and Setting Cruise Control cancels the set speed memory 1 Move the cruise control switch to oT h i i i On Turns the cruise control system on let up to the deshedapesd Resume Accelerate Resume a set speed or to 3 Press 9 at the end of the lever and release it accelerate 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal y Set Press this button located at the end of the lever to set a speed Some vehicles have a cruise light on the y instrument panel cluster that will come on when the cruise control is engaged Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brake is applied this shuts off the cruise control But it does not need to be reset Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph 40 km h or more move the cruise control switch briefly from to The vehicle returns to the previously chosen speed and stays there If the switch is held on resume accelerate the vehicle keeps going faster until the switch is released or the brakes are applied So unless you want the ve
20. When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode has been chosen as the default display See DISPL display later in this section for more information The new track name displays 3 81 File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the file name does not display Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 WMA Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and READING displays The CD should begin playing and the CD symbol displays To insert a CD while the ignition is off first press the A button or the DISPL knob 3 82 If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play th
21. CD AUTO AUTO 5 lt bd S Base MP3 Radio shown Bose similar Base Radio Shown Bose Similar 3 64 K SEEI N SCAN a AUDIO TYPE z push turn He mD aAA Se UPDATE Base Six Disc CD Radio shown Bose similar The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system If the vehicle has the Bose audio system it has six Bose amplified speakers Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS the radio can do the following Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies Display messages from radio stations This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available In rare cases a radio station can broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While the radio is tuned to an RDS station the station name or call letters display instead of the frequency RDS stations can also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast 3 65 Playing the Radio PWR Power Push to turn the system on and off lt 1 D VOL or VOLUME Turn to increase or to decrease the volume
22. DISPL Display or INFO Information Press to display the time while the ignition is off For RDS press to change the information while using RDS The display options are station name RDS station frequency PTY program type and the name of the program if available For XM press to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel Artist Song Title Category or PTY Channel Number Channel Name To change the default on the display press the DISPL or INFO knob until the desired display is shown then briefly press and hold the knob until a beep is heard The selected display becomes the default 3 66 AUTO VOL Automatic Volume With automatic volume the audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise while driving by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select LOW MEDIUM or HIGH AVOL or depending on the radio MIN MED or MAX AUTO VOL Each higher setting provides more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds On some radios NONE may display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed To turn automatic volume off press this button until OFF AVOL OFF or AUTO VOL OFF displays Finding a Station BAND Press to choose between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 lt TUNE Turn to select radio stations lt DIK DI SEEK Press either SEEK arrow or depending on the rad
23. If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 5 70 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for additional information 5 72 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and addi
24. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming Universal Home Remote procedures regardless of where you live replace Step 3 under Programming Universal Home Remote with the following Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and release every two seconds cycle the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Home Remote The Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly Proceed with Step 4 under Programming Universal Home Remote to complete Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal Home Remote device 1 Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds 2 Release both buttons Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote buttons repeat the programming instructions earlier in this section beginning with Step 2 For help or information on the Universal Home Re
25. Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation Canada Only eeeeeeeneeeeeees 2 18 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 20 New Vehicle Break In eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 20 IGNITION POSITIONS Ass rnain siia 2 21 Retained Accessory Power RAP csccccccc 2 22 Starting the Engine cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 2 22 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 23 Engine Coolant Heater cceeeeeeeeee eee ees 2 24 Active Fuel Management eee eres 2 25 Automatic Transmission Operation 6 2 25 Four Wheel Drive ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 28 Parking Brake wijiciaiecctuctdioncca anne rent rl syd 2 33 Shifting Into Park sencese arrede kran el 2 34 Shifting Out Of Park cisisesicccdeseseiaineders ce aneenecneee 2 36 Parking Over Things That Burn s es 2 36 Engine Exhaust za sn eks ones 2 37 Running the Vehicle While Parked 2 38 MINT ONS oiana AS 2 39 Manual Rearview Mirror ccce 2 39 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 2 39 COMPASS rare rener reeks 2 40 Outside Manual Mirrors cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 41 Outside Power Mirrors W u u dssseverererrerererere 2 42 Outside Convex Mirror W u dsseeevereeerrere renees 2 42 Outside Heated Mirrors ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 2 42 2 1 Section 2 Features and Controls OnStar System l l 2 43 Luggage Carrier 1 W W u sssseeveeeeee
26. single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner Care of CDs Sound quality can be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled Handle them carefully Store CD R s in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Care of the CD and DVD Player Do not add a label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into t
27. 00 1 61 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 62 When Should an Airbag Inflate 0 1 60 Where Are the Airbags eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 58 Antenna Fixed Mast cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 112 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna SYS Le Mie ann reen ek E hb ALLES 3 112 Antilock Brake System ABS aseeseen 4 5 Antilock Brake System Warning Light 3 36 Appearance Care Aluminum Wheels 0 cseeeeeeeeeee erences 5 109 Care of Safety Belts ceeeeeeeeeee neces 5 106 Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeeeeeee ees 5 110 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 04 5 107 Fabric Carpet cccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeaes 5 104 Finish Gate sitesinin eee ates 5 108 Finish Damage essre teni semiasi sn 5 110 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces eseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 5 106 Interior Cleaning 1 2 2 cee eeeeeee eee eee eee eee een eees 5 103 Leather eee sees td cencedaids inienn ai 5 105 Sheet Metal Damage eeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 109 TOS sneis eaaa thes catapieadcaeeyaun gad 5 109 Underbody Maintenance eeeeeeeeee 5 110 Washing Your Vehicle ceeeeeeeeee eee eee es 5 107 Weathersttips 2 245 tor rer ban render Russ 5 106 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 108 Appointments Scheduling Service 0 7 10 ASHAY soeren an ner el E 3 19 Audi
28. 0ceeeeeeeeee 3 6 Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area 6eeeeeeees 2 52 Convenience Net cceeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneees 2 54 Glove BOX sacraro sr gene Era she 2 51 Luggage Carrier 2225 seks ae 2 52 Overhead Console cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenes 2 51 Rear Floor Storage Cover ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 53 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 5 87 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 008 4 30 SUM VISOMS seth Pei ea ni e EEA 2 15 SUNDOI sees Gacics aen AA Ene a EE Fahne 2 55 12 Tachometer cinsore eE E E esas ees 3 29 Taillamps Turn Signal and Stoplamps u sseseerereee 5 47 Theft Deterrent Radio ssssssseeeeeeeerreee 3 110 Theft Deterrent Systems W u sssseseneererereee 2 16 Content Theft Deterrent sssseeeeree 2 16 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 2 18 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer Operation sugar rr ele ees 2 18 PASSIOCK e ra aane EE en EN EARS 2 17 Tilt Wheel s rap annanru ole b Ko Laks 3 6 TME SeN anses aaan reen Een 3 63 Tire Pressure high Ea saneret NR 3 38 Tire Sealant SONNO san ne hane bh band nd 5 87 TE FE SR a 5 53 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning 0 5 109 Buying New Tires sirieni iinne 5 70 GAINS er siera a E SER E ER ERE 5 76 Changing a Flat Tire ececeeeeeee eee neee tenes 5 88 CIC ANING aseeseen aE ERE DERE RER 5 109 Different Size cc cece eee ee cee eec eee tees eeee
29. California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 38 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most
30. DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system makes the headlamps come on at reduced brightness when the following conditions are met The ignition is on The exterior lamps knob is in automatic headlamp mode The light sensor detects daytime light The transmission is not in P Park When the DRL are on only the headlamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker instrument panel lights and other lamps will not be on When it begins to get dark the headlamps automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside the Automatic Headlamp System turns on the headlamps when the vehicle is started and after the transmission has been shifted out of the P Park position The headlamps taillamps sidemarker and parking lamps will come on The instrument panel lights and radio lights will also turn on at normal brightness Once on the system remains on during these conditions even if the vehicle is shifted back into P Park The vehicle has a light sensor on the top of the instrument panel Do not cover the sensor or the system may come on whenever the ignition is on and the vehicle is shifted out of the P Park position The system could also turn on the lamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunn
31. Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline do not drive across it Find another route instead Ahill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across When going straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when driving across an incline the narrower track width the distance between the left and right wheels might not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide or a rollover 4 22 Surface conditions can be a problem Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause the tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression the vehicle can tilt even more For these reasons carefully consider whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might
32. Dual Climate Control System eeeeeeeeeee 3 19 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 5 3 96 EDR aenn E ae a es ER ae n 7 16 Electrical System Add On Equipment rirenieirdiisssisdaor diei 5 112 Engine Compartment Fuse Block 5 113 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 113 Headlamps aser een lent bedene ens 5 112 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 112 Rear Underseat Fuse Block ee 5 116 Windshield Wiper Fuses seeeeeeeeee es 5 112 Electronic Immobilizer PASS Key li espensierat 2 18 Electronic Immobilizer Operation PASS Key I ccccccccccccceesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeanees 2 18 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension SYSTEM ro aar lerende 4 45 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 2322225 vives veeseecenenescccss 5 20 Change Engine Oil Light cece 3 43 Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp 3 38 Coolant re nn herrederne ede 5 25 Coolant Heater W W ssseeeeeeeerrere renen en enes 2 24 Coolant Temperature Gage ceecee 3 37 Drive Belt Routing 0 c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 6 15 Engine Compartment Overview 0eeeee 5 12 Exhaust aiea aae E en nen oe 2 37 Fan NOISE ao ale aora ES 5 32 Oilein E RE 5 15 Oil Life System nunnai ehd URDU REE naen 5 18 Overheating seiicicncacds caw a pabswnsiu ene anann 5 30 Reduced Power Light ceeeseeeeereeees 3 44 SANG erines Re beroede e ai 2 22 Entry Lighti
33. If the bulb is not burned out check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 113 If the vehicle has a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps a turn signal flasher is used With this flasher installed the signal indicator flashes even if a turn signal bulb is burned out Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working Turn Signal On Chime A chime sounds if the turn signal has been on 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km Move the turn signal lever to off Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass This feature lets high beam headlamps be used to signal to a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam the high beam headlamps turn on They will stay on as long as the lever is held toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster comes on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers W Mist Turn the band to mist for a single wiping cycle Hold it the
34. Information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Your vehicle may have an electronically controlled air suspension system that automatically keeps your vehicle level as you load and unload your vehicle See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System on page 4 45 for additional Example 3 information Item Description Vehicle Capacity A Weight for velse Example 3 g Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs 1 o 91 kg x 5 453 kg Available Cargo 0 Ibs 0 kg 4 35 Certification Tire Label GAWR FRT GAWR RR A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and trailer tongue weight if pulling a trailer 4 36 The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on
35. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts The vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF position Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and acceler
36. Roadside Assistance Program For U S purchased vehicles call 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Text telephone TTY 1 888 889 2438 For Canadian purchased vehicles call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance have the following information ready Your name home address and home telephone number Telephone number of your location Location of the vehicle Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle e Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km whichever comes first In the U S anyone driving the vehicle is covered In Canada a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification 7 8 GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often or the same type of claim is made many times Services Provided Emergency Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service statio
37. See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Climate Control System on page 3 19 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 for more information OnStar System OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If the airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location If the keys are locked in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the doors OnStar Hands Free Calling including 30 trial minutes good for 60 days is available on most vehicles OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation service with one trial route is available on most vehicles Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber glove box literature Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar After the first prepaid year contact OnStar to select a monthly or annual subscription payment plan If a payment plan is not selected the OnStar system and all services including airbag notification and emergency services may be deactivated and no longer available For more information visit onstar com U S o
38. UNITS U S ENGLISH is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings UNITS U S ENGLISH default All information will be displayed in English units UNITS METRIC km L All information will be displayed in metric units UNITS METRIC L 100 km All information will be displayed in metric units To select a setting and exit out of the customizable options press I while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 62 Audio System s Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features A CAUTION Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving do the following while the vehicle is parked Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system Set up the tone speaker adjustments and preset radio stations For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Notice Contact your dealer retailer before adding any equipment Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the vehicle s engine radio or other systems and could damage them Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment
39. When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck the fluid level after filling Engine Specifications COO e TT vin cor Spark Pug Gap 5 3L V8 Engine 0 040 in 1 01 mm 5 121 42 NOTES 5 122 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule W ssssseeeerererrerenee 6 2 Owner Checks and Services ceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 8 IMMOGUCHION 0 5 ET 6 2 At Each Fuel Pill LL 2 samles iauten 6 9 Maintenance Requirements ccecce 6 2 At Least Once a Month o on 6 9 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 At Least Once a Year ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee trees 6 10 Using the Maintenance Schedule e seceeeeeen 6 2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance ccseeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 6 4 Maintenance Replacement Parts 004 6 14 Additional Required Services ceeeeeeee ee 6 6 Engine Drive Belt Routing eee 6 15 Maintenance Footnotes ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 7 Maintenance Record eceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ens 6 16 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements the vehicle warranties See the Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer retailer for details Maintena
40. ceeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 7 11 Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Service Publications Ordering Information Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Event Data Recorders OnStar Navigation System Radio Frequency Identification RFID Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help in the U S call the GMC Consumer Relations Manager at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Customer Assistance prompt In
41. connectors input right and left audio Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper connection of the auxiliary device To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded RCA jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the RSE system power on If the RSE system had been previously in the DVD player mode pressing the SRCE button on the faceplate or the remote control switches the RSE system between the auxiliary device and the DVD player 3 98 How to Change the Video Format when in the Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC In some countries the video format may be in the PAL system To change the video format 1 Press the L display menu button 2 Press the down W navigation arrow to highlight the Video Format option 3 Press the lt button to select Video Format 4 Press the left lt or right gt navigation arrows to select the desired video format 5 Press the lt button to accept the change Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be heard through the following possible sources e Wireless Headphones Vehicle Speakers Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat Audio system if equipped The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information The RSE system is capab
42. in random order press and hold RDM for more than two seconds A beep sounds and RANDOM ALL displays Press again to turn off random play AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press to select the equalization setting while playing a CD The equalization is stored when a CD is played For more information on AUTO EQ see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section K pl MD SEEK Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or to the previous track On some radios pressing the left arrow if more than 10 seconds have played goes to the start of the current track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track If either arrow is pressed more than once the player continues moving backward or forward through the CD On some radios pressing either arrow for more than two seconds scans the previous or next tracks at five to eight seconds per track SCAN and the track number displays K SCAN To scan one CD press and hold either SCAN or depending on the radio the TYPE arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN or TRACK SCAN displays and a beep is heard The radio goes to the next track plays for 10 seconds then goes to the next track Press either SCAN or depending on the radio TYPE arrow again to stop scanning To scan all loaded CDs press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until ALL CD SCAN displays and a beep sounds Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tr
43. make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it a b The belt is twisted across the body 1 26 Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap shoulder belt The following instructions explain how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 2 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger belt out all the way the child restraint locking feature may be engaged If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the right front seating position may affect the passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 64 for more information Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 32 Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 27 4 To make the lap part tight pull up on the should
44. or defog mode the air conditioning symbol turns off however the A C compressor remains on to help de humidify the air inside the vehicle If one of the other modes is selected the compressor will then turn the A C off until it is selected again or the AUTO button is pressed To avoid fogging the inside glass on rainy and humid days at a temperature above freezing press the air conditioning button to run the A C compressor Also it is best to avoid the use of the recirculation mode except when maximum air conditioning performance is needed or for short times to avoid exterior odors You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again This is normal lt amp Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on or off An indicator light comes on to show that recirculation is on This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle Recirculation mode can be used with vent and bi level modes but it cannot be used with floor defog or defrost modes If recirculation mode is selected with floor defog or defrost modes the indicator flashes three times and turns off to indicate the selection is not available The air conditioning compressor may also run while in recirculation mode This is normal and helps to prevent window fogging If the weather is c
45. readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 for more information Notice If an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 61 See your dealer retailer for service Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ACAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible lf the vehicle has been in a crash do you need new safety belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system if equipped was not being used at the time of the crash If
46. s performance occurs The vehicle can be driven at a reduced speed when the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced The performance may be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle If this light stays on see your dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair This light may also come on if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If this happens take the vehicle in for service as soon as possible 3 44 Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 for more information Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light ne This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it is working The service four wheel drive light comes on to indicate that there may be a problem with the drive system and service is required Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle This system is also designed to assist your dealer in correctly diagnosing a malfunction Check Gages Warning Light ske The check gages light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine lf the light comes on and stays on while you are driving check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones Gate Ajar Light If this
47. see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5 72 for additional important information Because I have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring 1 69 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then check the safety belt reminder light safety belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are all working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job See your dealer retailer to have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 30 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 5 106 1 70 Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag
48. that child restraint and the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 43 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint 1 41 Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint syst
49. that the transfer case is in Neutral Turn the engine off by turning the key to ACC ACCESSORY Place the transmission shift lever in P Park Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF 2 32 Shifting Out of Neutral To shift the transfer case out of Neutral do the following l Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off Put the transmission in N Neutral Turn the transfer case knob to the desired position Two Wheel High Four Wheel High or Auto Four Wheel Drive After the transfer case has shifted out of Neutral the indicator light will go out Release the parking brake Start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your foot and pull up on the parking brake lever located between the seats To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press in the button at the end of the lever Hold the button in as you move the parking brake lever all the way down If the ignition is on the brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 35 Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that the parking brake is fully released
50. tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to CAUTION Continued 5 96 Secondary Latch System This vehicle may have an underbody mounted tire hoist AN CAUTION assembly equipped with a secondary latch system It is designed to stop the spare tire if the vehicle has one Someone standing too close during the procedure from suddenly falling off the vehicle if the cable holding ini i the spare tire is damaged For the secondary latch to opulo BS injures by ME Jaak 1 Me spare We Hogs work the tire must be stored with the valve stem pointing up See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 100 for instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from the under spare To release the spare tire from the secondary latch 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the A CAUTION cable is visible If it is Before beginning this procedure read all the not visible proceed instructions Failure to read and follow the to Step 6 instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read and follow the instructions listed next 5 97 2 If visible first try to tighten the cable by turning the whe
51. 160 km h Set the cold inflation pressure for the rear tires only to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall or 38 psi 262 kPa whichever is lower See the example following When you end this high speed driving return the tires to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 Example You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire s sidewall in small letters near the rim flange It will read something like this Maximum load 690 kg 1521 Ibs 300 kPa 44 psi Max Press For this example you would set the inflation pressure for high speed driving at 38 psi 262 kPa The inflation pressure for the front tires should be set to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Racing or other competitive driving may affect the warranty coverage of your vehicle See your warranty booklet for more information Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflatio
52. 6 8 tells what should be checked when to check it and what can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 When the vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Scheduled Maintenance When the change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message displays service is required for the vehicle See Change Engine Oil Light on page 3 43 or DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system Must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally service the vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 for in
53. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat s To recline the seatback do the following 1 Lift the recline lever 2 Move the seatback to the desired position then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked To return the seatback to an upright position do the Power Reclining Seatbacks following 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the lf your seats have power seatback and the seatback will return to the upright reclining seatbacks use position the vertical power seat control located on the outboard side of the seat s 2 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked To recline the seatback press the control toward the rear of the vehicle To raise the seatback press the control toward the front of the vehicle 1 8 ACAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could caus
54. FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment PASS Key Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation Canada Only Your vehicle has a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON RUN You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft deterrent system The key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer control unit in your vehicle Only the correct key will start the vehicle If the key is ever damaged you may not be able to start your vehicle When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not start and the se
55. Fuse Block 5 113 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 113 Rear Underseat Fuse Block o c 5 116 Windshield Wiper eeeeeeeeeneeeeeee eens 5 112 Gage Check Gages Warning Light 1 3 45 Engine Coolant Temperature 1 3 37 UGH E E E E A AT 3 46 Oil PreSSUre inasre aiig ore ahorn Le 3 42 Speedometer W u u sssseeeeere renere kernerne enue 3 29 Tachom eter ateena 3 29 Voltmeter Gage 2 80 rrskes bone bs ke dkerker rebel 3 34 Garage Door Opener W W W W sseeeererererenee renerne 2 46 Gasoline Octane irene e A ENEA 5 5 Specifications 5553457 aene inan teneas 5 6 Gate Ajar Light enneren eain Redder 3 45 GIOVE BOX 7025 rss ole aane e tances 2 51 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program W 1 1 W1 7 7 Hazard Warning Flashers ceceeeeeeeeeeneee es 3 6 Head Restraints score hanne misno Ars D 1 10 Headlamp AMINO panenka ee E E 5 45 Headlamps s zssencscsnieisectieidecs cereseinacs 3 13 5 46 Bulb Replacement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 46 Daytime Running Lamp eeeeeeeeeeee eee ee 3 14 Electrical Systema redninger 5 112 Flash to PASS ri oser rasede 3 8 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps seniai 5 47 Halogen BUDS orense onian 5 46 High Low Beam Changer 1 W W u sssseneerereeerrere 3 8 OM REMIS 5530 roser inerea Sa aTi 3 14 Washer missni mare siiip ainiai Leer hes 3 10 Heated Seats 552255 0 cecececeeeeceeceeeeee esses eeaeene
56. GM original equipment wheel 5 75 Tire Chains A CAUTION Do not use tire chains There is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to the vehicle drive slowly re adjust or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle and do not spin the wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires 5 76 If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the
57. If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Do not overfill Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier in this section When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 5 24 Cooling System The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature 5 3L V8 Engine shown 4 2L L6 Engine similar A Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Engine Fan ACAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan ACAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you co
58. Say Yes to delete the phone The system responds with OK deleting lt phone name gt 3 88 Linking to a Different Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Change phone The system responds with Please wait while search for other phones e If another phone is found the response will be lt Phone name gt is now connected If another phone is not found the original phone remains connected Storing Name Tags The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems The system uses the following commands to store and retrieve phone numbers e Store Digit Store Directory Using the Store Command The store command allows a phone number to be stored without entering the digits individually ls 2 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Store The system responds with Store number please followed by a tone Say the complete phone number to be stored at once with no pauses e If the system recognizes the number it responds with OK Storing and repeats the phone number If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone number it responds with Store and repeats the number fol
59. See After an Airbag Inflates 1 62 Lap Shoulder Belt 1 2 eee 1 27 Passenger Sensing System 1 1 64 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 31 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 68 Safety Belt Extender cceeeeteeteeeteeees 1 32 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Child Restraints cesser 1 32 HE SEE og naam bee Older Children aces acscstssdatsashveseinddancathonaveitans 1 32 Restraint System Check sne 1 70 Infants and Young Children 1 35 Checking the Restraint Systems 0 5 1 70 Child Restraint Systems cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 1 39 Replacing Restraint System Parts Where to Put the Restraint ccccccecccceceeeeee 4 42 After a Crash icceccccccccscdvecssesvsidscdsseedeaten ead 1 71 1 1 Front Seats Manual Seats A CAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving 1 2 If the vehicle has a manual seat it can be moved forward or rearward 1 Lift the bar to unlock the seat 2 Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place Power Seats Manual Lumbar On vehicles with this feature the knob is located on the outboar
60. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 35 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time Actually doing it is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If the
61. The system responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK e If the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 e If the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu Using the Directory Command The directory command lists all of the name tags stored by the system To use the directory command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Directory The system responds with Directory and then plays back all of the stored name tags When the list is complete the system returns to the main menu 3 90 Deleting Name Tags The system uses the following commands to delete name tags Delete Delete all name tags Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted To use the delete command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Delete The system responds with Delete please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to be deleted The system responds with Would you like to delete lt name tag gt Please say yes or no Ifthe name tag is correct
62. This function does not apply for XM Satellite Radio Service Setting Preset PTYs RDS Only For the Base Radio pushbuttons have factory PTY presets Up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2 2 Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode P TYPE and the last selected PTY displays 3 Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until a beep sounds When that numbered pushbutton is pressed while in PTY mode the PTY that was set returns 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton RDS Messages ALERT MP3 Radio Alert warns of local or national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station ALERT displays The announcement is heard even if the volume is low or a CD is playing If a CD is playing play stops during the announcement Alert announcements cannot be turned off ALERT is not affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations TRAF Traffic MP3 Radio If TRAF displays the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and the traffic announcement is played when the tuned radio station broadcasts one lf the station does not broadcast traffic announcements press the TRAF button and the radio seeks to a station
63. Wheel Drive or Two Wheel High the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 2 mph 3 2 km h with the transmission in N Neutral and the engine running The preferred method for shifting out of Four Wheel Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Turn the knob to Four Wheel High Auto Four Wheel Drive or Two Wheel High You must wait for the Four Wheel High Auto Four Wheel Drive or Two Wheel High indicator light to stop flashing and stay off before shifting your transmission into gear If the knob is turned to Four Wheel High Auto Four Wheel Drive or Two Wheel High when the vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel High Auto Four Wheel Drive or Two Wheel High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds It will not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 2 mph 3 2 km h with the transmission in N Neutral 2 31 Shifting into Neutral Before shifting the transfer case to Neutral first make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll aPfFon gt Set the parking brake Start the vehicle Put the transmission in N Neutral Shift the transfer case to Two Wheel High Turn the transfer case knob all of the way past Four Wheel Low and hold it there for a minimum of 10 seconds The Neutral indicator light will come on With the engine running shift the transmission to R Reverse for one second then shift the transmission to D Drive for one second to ensure
64. a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 1 43 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child lower attachments B restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor 1 44 Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restrain
65. actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil L6 Engine SEERE RESO V8 Engine If the oil is below the L mark for the L6 engine or the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick for the V8 engine add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 120 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area F that shows the proper operating range for the L6 engine or above the cross hatched area for the V8 engine the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil fill cap 7 AAAA SAE 5W 30 AR Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT c LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM6094M DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER e GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M e SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 30 is best for the vehicle These numbe
66. and the brake warning light is off before driving If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill see Towing a Trailer on page 4 46 2 33 Shifting Into Park A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow With four wheel drive the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park if your transfer case is in Neutral So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in Neutral See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 Always put the shift lever fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 46 2 34 To shift into P Park i Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set the parking brake Move the shift lever into P Park by pressing the button on the side of the shift lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle Turn the ignition key to OFF LOCK Remove the key and take it with you You know the vehicle is in P Park if the key can be removed from the ignition Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running ACAUTION It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with
67. avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving Vehicles with four wheel drive can be used for off road driving Vehicles without four wheel drive should not be driven off road except on a level solid surface The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road and this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Off roading can be great fun but has some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself When off road driving traffic lanes are not marked curves are not banked and there are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill 4 13 Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers Failure to operate the vehicle correctly off road could result in loss of vehicle control or vehicle rollover Off roading involves some new skills That is why it is very important that you read these driving tips and suggestions to help make off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading Have all necessary maintenance an
68. based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on reset the system To reset the Engine Oil Life System 1 Turn the ignition key to ON RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds The change engine oil light will flash while the system is resetting 3 When the light stops flashing turn the key to LOCK OFF If the light message comes back on when the vehicle is started the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Recycle it by taking it toa place that collects used oil Engine Air Cl
69. child correctly In a crash the child The top tether anchors for each rear seating position could be seriously injured or killed Install a are located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle LATCH type child restraint properly using the Do not use the rear tie down brackets near the liftgate anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure m bre ie rn die hel de oo ke the restraint following the instructions that came position where the child restraint will be placed a CHIC restrant ane Ue INStrUGHONS Titas Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached 1 46 ACAUTION Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash attach only one child restraint per anchor ACAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lo
70. close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your dealer retailer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 and Airbag System on page 1 55 for more information SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays if a problem occurs with the brake system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display 3 54 If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service See your dealer retailer SERVICE CHARGING SYS System This message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 3 33 The battery will not be charging at an optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode The vehicle is safe to drive however you should have the electrical system checked by your dealer retailer SERVICE STABILITRAK If this message displays it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system If this message appears try to reset the system by performing the following stop turn off the engine then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means th
71. conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down Q If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear safety belts A Airbags are supplemental systems only so they or the safety belts work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from home why should wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you are in a crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are d
72. construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description The service description indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire The load index can range from 1 to 279 Speed ratings range from A to Z Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fu
73. deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be cov
74. differently than the factory setting Choose one of the two programming options listed previously before entering the program mode To enter the program mode do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 Turn the key to ON RUN and LOCK OFF twice Then with the key in LOCK OFF release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second program timer will begin 3 You are now ready to program the automatic door locks Select one of the two programming options listed previously and press the lock side of the power door lock switch to cycle through the lock options You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to ON RUN The locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current auto lock unlock setting will not be modified See your dealer for more information Pr
75. display is located on the instrument panel cluster below the speedometer If your vehicle has DIC buttons they are located on the steering wheel The DIC can display information such as the trip odometer fuel economy customization features and warning status messages If your vehicle does not have DIC steering wheel buttons you will not have all of the features listed Scroll through the odometer and trip odometer by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster Turn off or acknowledge DIC messages by pressing the trip odometer reset stem See Speedometer and Odometer on page 3 29 for information on features for vehicles without DIC buttons 3 47 ip ZX Trip Information Press this button to display the odometer trip odometers tire pressure and timer id Fuel Information Press this button to display the current range fuel used average fuel economy and engine oil life i Customization Press this button to access the vehicle settings menu and customize the personal settings on your vehicle lt a Select Press this button to reset certain DIC functions and set your customization settings Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display 3 48 DIC Operation and Displays The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned
76. driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or Vehicles with Vehicles witha DIC Vehicles witha DIC snow and you may want to rock the vehicle in an attempt to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 30 for more information When the transfer case is in 4LO the stability system is automatically disabled The StabiliTrak light will come on and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on the DIC The StabiliTrak system cannot be turned on until the vehicle is switched to 2HI 4HI or 4AWD The following chart describes the StabiliTrak system events and the corresponding messages and lights that will be displayed on the instrument panel cluster Vehicles withouta DIC Event StabiliTrak StabiliTrak StabiliTrak Indicator Light DIC Message Indicator Light Service Light Po 2 ie Traction gt StabiliTrak On mode System is fully enabled but is is activel controlling vehicle stability Traction Control Off Mode StabiliTrak Off Mode StabiliTrak indicator light will flash Si system first enters this mode Vehicles with a DIC Blinking StabiliTrak Active Blinking i Service StabiliTrak Not Ready Solid Notice If the StabiliTrak light comes on due to heavy braking and or be
77. economically United States Uplevel version shown Canada and Base similar 3 28 Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer the vehicle speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Press the trip stem located on the instrument panel cluster lf the vehicle needs a new odometer installed the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero The odometer works together with the Driver Information Center DIC You can set a Trip A and Trip B odometer See Trip Information under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Press the trip stem on the instrument panel cluster Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm RPM X 1000 3 29 Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt unless the driver safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds then flashes for several more
78. engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven brake normally but do not pump the brakes If the brakes are pumped the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Antilock Brake System ABS This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away ABS checks itself A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light stays on See Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light on page 3 36 Along with ABS the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning DRP system If there is a DRP problem both the brake and ABS warning lights come on accompanied by a 10 second chime The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on until the problem is repaired See your dealer retailer for service Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens
79. filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into the engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 21 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealer retailer service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C At high speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer
80. followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered Using the Digit Dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Digit Dial The system responds with Digit dial using lt phone name gt please say the first digit to dial followed by a tone 3 91 3 Usi i 3 92 Say the digit to be dialed one at a time Following each digit the system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be dialed is complete After the whole number has been entered say Dial The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number e If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them ng the Call Command Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Call The system responds with Call using lt phone name gt Please say the name tag followed by a tone Say the name tag of the person to call If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK calling lt name
81. for all Radios except the MP3 Radio 1 Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode TYPE or P TYPE and the last selected PTY displays 2 Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY 3 Once the desired PTY displays press and hold either SCAN or TYPE arrow for two seconds and the radio begins scanning the stations in the PTY 4 Press either SCAN or TYPE arrow to stop scanning 3 69 To select and find a desired PTY for the MP3 Radio 1 Turn the P TYPE knob to select a PTY 2 Press the SEEK TYPE button to select and go to the PTY s first station 3 Press the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and then go to another station 4 Press the P TYPE knob to exit program type select mode IF PTY times out and no longer displays go back to Step 1 If both PTY and TRAF are on the radio searches for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements If the radio cannot find the desired program type NONE displays and the radio returns to the last station BAND Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency lets the radio switch to a stronger station with the same program type To turn alternate frequency on press and hold BAND for two seconds AF ON displays The radio can switch to stations with a stronger frequency 3 70 To turn alternate frequency off press and hold BAND again for two seconds AF OFF displays The radio does not switch to other stations
82. from the vehicle 5 47 Back Up Lamps The back up lamps are located in the rear bumper To replace a bulb 4 Unclip the wiring harness A and remove the three socket retaining screws B 5 Remove the socket plate 6 Holding the socket pull the bulb to straight out release it from the socket 7 Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks 1 Reach behind the rear bumper and locate the bulb socket 2 Turn it counterclockwise to remove from the lamp ae ki assembly 8 Remstatithe was et piate ang ihree Screws 3 Holding the socket pull the old bulb to release it 9 Reconnect the wiring harness from the socket 10 Reinstall the taillamp assembly by lining up the 4 Push in a new bulb into the bulb socket until it locator pins with the retainers in the body of the clicks vehicle i 5 Reinstall the bulb socket into the lamp assembly 11 Reinstall the two screws and turn it clockwise to secure 5 48 License Plate Lamp 1 af oO NM Remove the two screws holding the license plate lamp lens Pull the lens away from the lamp assembly Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks Replace the lamp assembly lens and tighten the screws Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back up Lamps Rear Turn Signal 3
83. ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense fuel only into approved containers coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things Do not fill a container while it is inside a that will burn onto a hot engine vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Hood Release To open the hood 1 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle under the instrument panel on the driver side 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release 3 Lift the hood release the prop rod from its retainer and put the prop rod into the slot in the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the prop rod Remove the prop rod from its slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer Lower the hood 6 to 8 inches 15 to 20 cm above the vehicle and release it to latch fully Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat the proces
84. in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows The rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events although no system can prevent all such ejections But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 60 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts 1 62 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 61 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle ACAUTION When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing troub
85. inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 64 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 120 ACAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 88 Make sure the spare tire if the vehicle has one is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 100 When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not
86. listen to and control CDs or DVDs through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones The front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls If the front seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to a remote source the RSA is not able to control the source The rear seat audio can be operated while the main radio is off Oo Power Press to turn the system on or off The rear speakers are muted when the power is turned on a Volume Turn to increase or to decrease the volume The left volume knob controls the left wired headphones and the right volume knob controls the right wired headphones SRCE Source Press to select a source radio CD or DVD The inactive CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening SEEK Press to advance to the next station or track and stay there The display shows the selection This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to the same audio source 3 109 To scan preset stations press and hold the SEEK button for two seconds and the radio advances to the next preset station If the button continues to be held down the radio advances through the available preset stations The display shows the selections This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listing to the radio While a CD is playing
87. long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will roll back to zero To stop the counting of time press the select button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the select button while TIMER is displayed Fuel Information Button iD Fuel Information Press the fuel information button to scroll through the range fuel used average fuel economy and the engine oil life system Fuel Range Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears on the display This mode shows the remaining distance you can drive without refueling It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the fuel tank The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an average of recent driving conditions As your driving conditions change this data is gradually updated Fuel range cannot be reset 3 50 Fuel Used Press the fuel information button until FUEL USED appears on the display This mode shows the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the select button for one second while FUEL USED is displayed Average Fuel Economy Press the fuel information button until AVG ECON appears on the display This mode shows how many mile
88. low The low setting warms the seatback and seat cushion until the seat temperature is near body temperature The medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat cushion to a slightly higher temperature You will be able to feel heat in about two minutes To heat only the seatback press the vertical button with the heated seatback symbol An indicator light on the button will come on to designate that only the seatback is being heated Additional presses will cycle through the heat levels for the seatback only The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition is turned off Memory Seat If your vehicle has this feature the controls for the memory function are located on the driver door These buttons are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seating position and the adjustable pedals if equipped The settings for these features can be saved for up to two drivers To store the memory settings 1 Adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner and lumbar and the adjustable pedals if equipped to the desired position See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2 23 for more information 2 Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory control for three seconds A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored To repeat the procedure for a second driver follow the preceding steps but press the other numbered memory control button To re
89. motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button After you press this button you will have 30 seconds to complete Step 8 2 49 8 Immediately return to the vehicle Firmly press and hold the Universal Home Remote button chosen in Step 3 to control the garage door for two seconds and then release it If the garage door does not move press and hold the same button a second time for two seconds and then release it Again if the door does not move press and hold the same button a third time for two seconds and then release The Universal Home Remote should now activate the garage door To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 of Programming the Universal Home Remote System Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all previous programming from the Universal Home Remote buttons Gate Operator and Canadian Programming If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 800 355 3515 or go to www homelink com Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming Similarly some U S gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner 2 50
90. negative cable to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal Disconnect the jumper cables in reverse order that they were installed Do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it in
91. on Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading The compressor may be turned on off until the correct pressure is reached Notice If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes the vehicle should not be driven farther The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 11 Press the on off button B to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in the tire therefore Steps 12 through 18 must be done immediately after Step 11 Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage 5 82 12 Unplug the power plug H from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle 13 Turn the sealant air hose F counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem 14 Replace the tire valve stem cap 15 Replace the sealant air hose F and the power plug H back in their original location 16 If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation pressure remove the maximum speed label from the sealant canister E and place it in a highly visible location The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph 90 km h until t
92. on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 53 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 1 54 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure lf the airbag is off the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started lf a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit see If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page 1 64 for more information To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags A frontal airbag for the driver A frontal airbag for the ri
93. parking brake does not release fully lf it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means your vehicle has a brake problem A chime may also sound when the light comes on Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away Canada United States This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON RUN If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 38 A CAUTION The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped have the vehicle towed for service 3 35 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light comes on briefly when the
94. press the button with the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter UNLOCK FEEDBACK BOTH The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock button UNLOCK FEEDBACK OFF There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle To select a setting and move on to the next feature press I while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Headlamp Delay Press until HEADLAMP DELAY 10 SEC appears in the display To select your preference for how long the headlamps will stay on after you turn off the vehicle press lt while HEADLAMP DELAY 10 SEC is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt lt will scroll through the following settings HEADLAMP DELAY 10 SEC Seconds default The headlamps will stay on for 10 seconds HEADLAMP DELAY 20 SEC The headlamps will stay on for 20 seconds HEADLAMP DELAY 40 SEC The headlamps will stay on for 40 seconds HEADLAMP DELAY 1 MIN Minute The headlamps will stay on for 1 minute HEADLAMP DELAY 2 MIN The headlamps will stay on for 2 minutes HEADLAMP DELAY 3 MIN The headlamps will stay on for 3 minutes HEADLAMP DELAY OFF The headlamps will not turn on To select a setting and move on to the next feature press I while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Perimeter Lights Press 1 until PERIMETER LIGHTS ON appears in the display To select you
95. quickly within a track For the Base Radio press and hold for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to play the passage ET and or the elapsed time of the track displays 3 75 5 CD Press to play a CD while listening to the radio The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded RPT Repeat With the repeat setting one track or an entire CD can be repeated To use repeat do the following To repeat a track press and release the RPT button RPT displays Press again to turn off repeat play To repeat the CD press and hold the RPT button for two seconds RPT displays Press again to turn off repeat play 6 RDM Random Base Radio or MP3 Radio Press to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM ON displays RDM T or RDM and the track number displays when each track starts to play Press again to turn off random play RDM OFF displays RDM Random With the random setting tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD or on all of the CDs To use random do one of the following To play the tracks on the CD in random order press and release the RDM button RANDOM ONE displays Press again to turn off random play 3 76 To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
96. say Yes to delete the name tag The system responds with OK deleting lt name tag gt returning to the main menu Ifthe name tag is incorrect say No The system responds with No OK let s try again please say the name tag Using the Delete All Name Tags Command The delete all name tags command deletes all stored phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar if present To use the delete all name tags command 1 2 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Delete all name tags The system responds with You are about to delete all name tags stored in your phone directory and your route destination directory Are you sure you want to do this Please say yes or no e Say Yes to delete all name tags Say No to cancel the function and return to the main menu Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands Dial Digit Dial Call Re dial Using the Dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Dial The system responds with Dial using lt phone name gt Number please followed by a tone Say the entire number without pausing e If the system recognizes the number it responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If the system does not recognize the number it confirms the numbers
97. section DVD Player Buttons Without Sunroof Panasonic D Power Press to turn the RSE system on and off The power indicator light illuminates when the power is on a Eject Press to eject a DVD or CD SRCE Source Press to switch between the DVD player and an auxiliary source HE Stop Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD or CD Press twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press to start play of a DVD or CD Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it Press again to continue the play of the DVD or CD Main DVD Menu Press to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when playing a DVD L Set up Menu Press to adjust the color tint brightness contrast display mode and dynamic range compression The dynamic range compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase low audio produced by some DVDs To change a feature back to the factory default setting press this button to display the feature then press and hold until the default setting displays While playing an Audio or DVD disc press and hold LJ to display and to remove the track and time information A V lt gt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrows to navigate through a menu lt a Enter Press
98. see Airbag System on page 1 55 The airbag readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started If the light does not come on then have it fixed immediately ACAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving it means the airbag system might not be working properly The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury have the vehicle serviced right away If there is a problem with the airbag system an airbag Driver Information Center DIC message can also come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 for more information 3 31 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has the passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 64 for important safety information The rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status indicator ogame ON PASSENGER AIR BAG United States Ro Rhi Canada 3 32 When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right
99. should normally leave StabiliTrak on However you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it or if you are driving in extreme off road conditions and require more wheel spin See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 30 To turn the StabiliTrak system back on press the StabiliTrak button again There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear The message may display if the brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 35 The message displays if the vehicle is shifted into 4LO The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present 3 55 TIGHTEN FUEL CAP This message may display and a chime may sound if the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly Fully reinstall the fuel cap See Filling the Tank on page 5 8 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere This message remains on until it is manually cleared from the DIC display The DIC message is also cancelled if the ignition is turned off The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon light may come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap is still not tightened properly See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 38 for
100. should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly 1 31 Safety Belt Extender If the safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender 1 32 Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no ret
101. supplied by the manufacturer of your garage door opener receiver motor head unit At the same time press and hold both the Universal Home Remote button to be used to control the garage door and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the Universal Home Remote button or the hand held transmitter button until Step 4 has been completed Some entry gates and garage door openers may require substitution of Step 3 with the procedure noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming later in this section 4 The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons 5 Press and hold the newly trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on continuously the programming is complete and the garage door should move when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released There is no need to continue programming Steps 6 through 8 If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with the programming Steps 6 through 8 It may be helpful to have another person assist with the remaining steps Sap Canoe orc Oo After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed locate inside the garage the garage door opener receiver
102. system that enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder has been tampered with the fuel system is disabled and the vehicle will not start During normal operation the security light will turn off about five seconds after the key is turned to ON RUN If the engine stalls and the security light flashes wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine does not start after three tries the vehicle needs service If the engine is running and the security light comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer retailer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time You may also want to check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 113 See your dealer retailer for service In an emergency call the Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle 2 17 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer The PASS Key Ill system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the
103. tag gt and dials the number If the system is unsure it recognizes the right name tag it confirms the name tag followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number If the name tag is not correct say No The system will ask for the name tag to be re entered Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Using the Re dial Command i Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone After the tone say Re dial The system responds with Re dial using lt phone name gt and dials the last number called from the connected Bluetooth phone Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Receiving a Call When an incoming call is received the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle Press and begin speaking to answer the call Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work Press to answer an incoming call when another call is active The original call is placed on hold Press again to return to the original call To ignore the incoming call continue with the original call with no action Three Way Calling Three Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless servic
104. that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service 1 63 Passenger Sensing System The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible in the rearview mirror when the vehicle is started PASSENGER AIR BAG ogame ON United States Rb RY Canada The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or OFF or the symbol for on or off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 32 1 64 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbags and roof rail airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not According to accident statistics children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child ri
105. that does When a station that broadcasts traffic announcements is found the radio stops seeking and TRAF displays If no station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements No Traf displays If TRAF displays press the TRAF button to turn off the traffic announcements The radio plays the traffic announcement if the volume is low The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements This function does not apply to XM Satellite Radio Service INFO Information If the current station has a message the information symbol or INFO displays Press this button to see the message The message can display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the entire message is not displayed parts of the message appears every three seconds To scroll through the message press and release the INFO button A new group of words displays after every press of this button Once the complete message has displayed the information symbol or INFO disappears from the display until another new message is received The last message is displayed by pressing the INFO button View the last message until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to 3 71 Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error Displays if the radio is no longer calibrated properly for the vehicle The vehicle must be returned to your dealer retailer for service LOCKED Displays when the THEFTLOCK system
106. to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu 3 101 DVD Player Buttons With Sunroof gt Play Pause Press to start play of a DVD or CD Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it Press again to continue the play of the DVD or CD HH A Stop Eject Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD or CD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD Press and hold this button for more than three seconds to eject a DVD or CD 3 102 Playing a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player continues loading the disc and the player automatically starts if the vehicle is in ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or when RAP is active If a disc is already in the player press the play pause button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote control Some DVDs do not allow fast forwarding or skipping of the copyright information or the previews Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have finished If the DVD does not begin to play the main title refer to the on screen instructions Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a disc press and release the stop button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control To resume playback press the play pause button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control The movie should resume play from where it was last stopped if the disc has not been eje
107. towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations e What is the distance that will be travelled Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Is the proper towing equipment going to be used See your dealer retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations Is the vehicle ready to be towed Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4 26 Dinghy Towing Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground the drivetrain components could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed To properly tow these vehicles they should be placed on a flatbed truck or trailer 4 39 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a four wheel dr
108. under the armrests 1 23 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 24 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest ys SAY N A SET J g KK AT pea pP The belt is behind the body 1 25 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted
109. vehicle s interior 5 104 Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For any soil always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water lf any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After
110. warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold Moving about to keep warm also helps If it takes some time for help to arrive now and then when you run the engine push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps Do this as little as possible to save fuel 4 29 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 31 If the vehicle has a traction system it can often help to free a stuck vehicle Refer to the vehicle s traction system in the Index If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method 4 30 A CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on the vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 76 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the ste
111. with ABS A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel as required faster than any driver could This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard As the brakes are applied the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even with ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work The brakes might vibrate or some noise might be heard but this is normal Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help more than even the very best braking Brake Assist This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly an
112. 0 Ibs 3 266 kg and you might think 700 additional pounds 318 kg should be subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits The maximum trailer would only be 7 800 Ibs 3 538 kg You may go further and think the tongue weight should be limited to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR But the effect on the rear axle must still be considered Because the rear axle now weighs 3 100 Ibs 1 406 kg 900 Ibs 408 kg can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight that can be handled Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires Be sure the vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires These numbers can be found on the Certification Tire Label located on the B pillar below the door latch or see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 for more information Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle or the GAWR including the weight of t
113. 157 Lamp Stoplamp and Taillamp Front Sidemarker Lamps For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer retailer 5 49 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield Any damage that occurs would not be covered by your warranty Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield 1 To remove the old wiper blades lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position 5 50 A Blade Assembly D Blade Pivot B Arm Assembly E Hook Slot C Locking Tab F Arm Hook 2 Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook 3 Remove the insert from the blade assembly The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly At the notched end pull the insert from the blade assembly 4 To install the new wiper insert slide the insert D notched end last into the end with two blade claws A Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end B The plastic caps C will be forced off as the insert is fully inserted Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom claws Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on both sides of the inser
114. 2009 GMC Envoy and Envoy Denali Owner Manual AA Seats and Restraint System 1 1 Driving Your Vehicle sssssseeeereerrree 4 1 Front Seats pisimccrienirniirinceini aenst 1 2 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle _ 4 2 Rear Seats oo ccccecccc ccc ec enke kk kk eee eneenenes 1 11 TOWING siidine E LEENE 4 38 Safety Belts oo cece ccc ce ccc ee eee eeeeneenene 1 13 Service and Appearance Care c 00 5 1 Child Restraints oo eee cccecceee cece ee ee ees 1 32 SENICE serea cncuetioctmdnte cs e a ea aiia 5 3 Airbag SyStOM ooo cece monata anien oins 1 55 FUG seschoseetned a SETSAER DE SIRENE 5 5 Restraint System Check oo 1 70 Checking Things Under the Hood _ 5 10 Features and Controls 2222222 2 4 Rear Axle OPES CEES ESTEE EDEL EF EF EDEL EDEL REE 5 43 ES E N nn 2 3 Four Wheel DIVE spessrcicetasstentanct oenaninesinens 5 44 Doors and LOCKS lhaaa Laana naaa Laaah naunan DE7 Front AXl oo ceeeecececeeeceeaceeeeeueeeeaeenaeeneees 5 44 Windows cceeeeccceeeececeeeeecscecceeceeeetstsseeeeeees 2 13 Headlamp Aiming eres 5 45 Theft Deterrent Systems Bean ate ee Gales Dc oa 2 16 Bulb Replacement E EA TAEL AT ees 5 46 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 20 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 50 IMMIGFONS sa ah ne nad km dere Tante TE 2 39 MeS aeee n r S SE Ene 5 53 OnStar System secscceciivsseiriieveeesseccocndds 2 43
115. 368668 Rear 16 in 41 cm 158205 S Engine Drive Belt Routing 4 2L L6 Engine 5 3L V8 Engine 6 15 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 8 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or i Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer i Maintenance I or i Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer i Maintenance I or z Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 655 7 2 Online Owner Center 0c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users ceceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 6 Customer Assistance Offices 0ceeeeee 7 6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 7 Roadside Assistance Program eeeeeeeee es 7 7 Scheduling Service Appointments 06 7 10 Courtesy Transportation ccceeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 7 10 Collision Damage Repair
116. 5 108 Washer seonnut ara a a E E E E 3 9 Washer Fluid dr les as ends 5 34 14 Windshield cont Wiper Blade Replacement ceee 5 50 Wiper FUSES ean e renee 5 112 WIDETS esser Siemon cet Vha Eger bl use etter 3 8 Windshield Rear Washer Wiper sssseeeeeerreree 3 9 Winter Divina rn ee n E EEE 4 28 XM Radio Messages nensnscsnrnresernerrenrrenernre 3 84 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 112 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2
117. 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program E MOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830
118. Appearance Care ecuteccetuntidemat anetistise 5 103 Universal Home Remote System re APEE 2 46 Vehicle Identification AREE EE A REE SELE ERR DENDE 5 1 11 Storage Areas ok eeeeeeceseceeeeeeeteetesevecevevenens 2 51 Electrical System ssssssnsiseeseneser unerede seek 5 112 STE Tal gore ae SENSE SE RES BEDRE ETS SERENR 2 55 Capacities and Specifications ee 5 120 Instrument Panel 0 c00cccccceceeeeeeeseeeeseeeeees 3 1 Maintenance Schedule seere 6 1 Instrument Panel Overview _ cece cc ceeceeeecs 3 4 Maintenance Schedule ccececceccecceceeceuss 6 2 Climate Controls oo eeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeea ees 3 19 Customer Assistance Information 7 1 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators _ 3 27 Customer Assistance and Information _ 7 2 Driver Information Center DIC www 3 47 Reporting Safety Defects n 7 14 Audio System S nesreci rennin 3 62 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy _ 7 16 Hadew Er cece states aoe T A 1 GM GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem GMC the GMC Truck Emblem and the names ENVOY and DENALI are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed GM reserves the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for GMC wherever it appears in this manual This manual describe
119. CD several times before stopping Do not repeatedly press the A button to eject a CD after pushing it in manually The player s 25 second eject timer resets at each press of eject causing the player to not eject the CD until the 25 second time period has elapsed 1 FLD V Previous MP3 Radio This pushbutton does not work while using a non MP3 CD 2 FLD A Next MP3 Radio This pushbutton does not work while using a non MP3 CD 1 PREV Previous Base Radio Press to go to the beginning of the current track if more than eight seconds have played or to the beginning of the previous track if less than eight seconds have played TRACK and the track number displays If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once the player continues moving backward through the CD 2 NEXT Base Radio Press to go to the next track TRACK and the track number displays If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once the player continues moving forward through the CD lt REV or 3 REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse quickly within a track For the Base Radio press and hold for less than two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to play the passage ET and or the elapsed time of the track displays FWD gt or 4 FWD Forward Press and hold to advance
120. Canada call General Motors of Canada Customer Communication at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting GMC remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest following Step One first STEP THREE U S Owners Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you can file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filling out a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will genera
121. Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver side of the engine compartment next to the battery box facing the engine 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 Volt AC outlet 2 24 A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts and prevent damage The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors Ask a dealer retailer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this Active Fuel Management 7 The vehicle s V8 engine may have Active Fuel Management This system allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its cylinders depending on driving conditions When less power is required such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed the system will operate in the half cylinder mode allowing the vehicle to achieve better fuel economy When greater power is required such as accelerating from a stop passing or merging onto a freewa
122. GES meeting requirements of NLGI 2 dealer retailer Category LB or GC LB GM Power aeg Fluid GM Part No U S 89021184 System in Canada 89021186 Automatic DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Usage Fluid Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Engine Oil Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil on page 5 15 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Key Lock GM Part No U S 12346241 Cylinders in Canada 10953474 Chassis Lubricant Chassis GM Part No U S 12377985 Lubrication in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant Front and GM Part No U S 89021677 in Canada 89021678 meeting GM Specification 9986115 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or System equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid ee Optikleen Washer Solvent Engine Coolant Usage Fluid Lubricant Transfer Case Rear Driveline Center Spline and Universal Joints Constant Velocity Universal Joint Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Latch Pivots Spring Anchor an Release Pawl AUTO TRAK II Fluid GM Part No U S 12378508 in Canada 10953626 Chassis Lub
123. How to Add Coolant to the Recovery Tank A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged If coolant is needed add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the FULL COLD mark start the vehicle 5 27 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator lf coolant is needed add the proper mixture directly to ACAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan A CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the surge tank 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left pressure cap even a lit
124. ILITRAK OFF The driver can turn off StabiliTrak by pressing the StabiliTrak button for more than five seconds The StabiliTrak light will come on and STABILITRAK OFF will be displayed For vehicles without a DIC the StabiliTrak indicator light will come on Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak button again will return the system to the STABILITRAK ON mode See StabiliTrak Off below for more information Traction Control Off In this mode stability control and brake traction control are functional Engine speed management will be modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activate more frequently If the controller detects excessive wheel spin in this mode the StabiliTrak indicator light may blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayed to warn the driver that damage may occur to the transfer case StabiliTrak Off In this mode both stability control and part of the traction control system are disabled The vehicle will still have brake traction control but will not be able to use the engine speed management system System noises may be heard as a result of the brake traction control coming on If the controller detects excessive wheel spin in this mode the StabiliTrak indicator light may blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayed to warn the driver that damage may occur to the transfer case It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
125. Minute Packages Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good for 60 days Hands Free Calling can also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U S or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada depending on eligibility To find out more refer to the OnStar Owner s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit onstar com or onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation Vehicles with the OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation system can provide voice guided driving directions Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor locate a business or address and download driving directions to the vehicle Voice guided directions to the desired destination will play through the audio system speakers See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses minutes to access location based weather local traffic reports and stock quotes Press the phone button and give a few simple voice commands to browse through the various topics See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information This feature is only available in the continental U S OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands Free Calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 110 for more information On som
126. Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus processing fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 U S plus processing fee 7 15 Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help your dealer retailer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store d
127. ack of each loaded CD Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning lt I TUNE gt MP3 Radio Turning this knob fast tracks reverse or advances through tracks The track number displays for each track DISPL Display or INFO Information Press to see how long the current track has been playing ET and or the elapsed time displays To change the default on the display track or elapsed time press until the desired display appears then press and hold briefly until a beep sounds The selected display becomes the default BAND Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD s remains inside the radio for future listening CD AUX Auxiliary Press to play a CD while listening to the radio or to listen to an auxiliary source such as rear seat entertainment if equipped Using Song List Mode The six disc CD changer has a feature called song list This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections To save tracks into the song list feature 1 Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one CD See LOAD CD listed previously in this section for more information 2 Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list mode S LIST should not appear on the display If S LIST displays press the SONG LIST button to turn it off 3 Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered pushbutton and then use the right SEEK or TYPE arrow to locate the track to be saved The track begins to pla
128. ained while in a vehicle ACAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle 1 35 A CAUTION Never do this Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle Due to crash forces an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg infant will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint 1 36 ACAUTION Never do this Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat Secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat It is also better to secure a forward facing child restrai
129. air inside of the vehicle more effectively Use of non GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Rear Climate Control System The vehicle has one of the following rear climate control systems With either of these systems the rear climate controls will be disabled when the front climate control system is in defrost This occurs to provide maximum airflow to clear the windshield 3 26 A Power Button B Air Delivery Mode Control The temperature of the air coming through the rear outlets is determined by the front passenger temperature setting PWR Power Press to turn the rear climate controls on or off Air Delivery Mode Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow to the rear seat area pe Panel Air is directed to the rear console outlets Wi Bi level Air is directed to the second seat side floor outlets and the rear console outlets tad Floor Air is directed to the second seat side floor outlets A Fan Control B Power Button C Air Delivery Mode Control lf the vehicle has the rear seat audio system the lower buttons are used to adjust the rear seat climate control system The temperature of the air coming through the rear outlets is determined by the front passenger temperature setting Oo On Off Press to turn the rear climat
130. alance between the right and the left speakers 1 Push and release until BAL balance displays 2 Turn to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers 1 Push and release this knob until FADE or FAD displays 2 Turn to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position while it is displayed push and hold the AUDIO knob On some radios push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until one beep is heard To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker controls display ALL CENTERED displays and a beep is heard Finding a Program Type PTY Station RDS and XM To select and find a desired PTY 1 Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode TYPE or P TYPE and the last selected PTY displays 2 Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY 3 Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select and to go to the PTY s first station 4 To go to another station within that PTY press the TYPE button then press either SEEK or TYPE arrow once 5 Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow twice to exit the program type select mode If the radio cannot find the desired program type NONE displays and the radio returns to the last station that was playing SCAN To scan the stations within a PTY
131. an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 1 71 42 NOTES 1 72 Section 2 Features and Controls KEYS anaren rer er rer een 2 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation iscddnicatladamiercancancemesncneensiacainess 2 5 Doors and LOCKS cece ee cee eee ee een ensins 2 7 DOOmLOGKS 3 cece cts a E E 2 7 Power Door LOCKS reder arge 2 8 Delayed LOCKING ci cai stpciteciceasewadastiebantieedsbess 2 8 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 9 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 11 Lockout Protection zcs cnuisensenevt viesntediasenntenseh 2 11 Liftgate LiftglaSs i cs c ccviencses cece ae beer 2 12 WINDOWS ipenira nan atiamheas eaten ths costae marten 2 13 Power WINdOWS 2 cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 14 UMN VISOS sccccvcscensheiachacacadannetavedcaseesacsaemeces 2 15 Theft Deterrent Systems cceeeeeeee eres 2 16 Content Theft Deterrent ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 16 Passlock U S Only cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 17 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 2 18 PASS Key
132. an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in rear facing child restraints Child Restraint Systems ACAUTION A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1 39 A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness A booster seat C D is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window 1 40 Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle ACAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with
133. and Loading Information label See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 The pressure gage C may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading The compressor may be turned on off until the correct pressure is reached 11 12 13 14 15 If you inflate the tire higher than the recommended pressure you can adjust the excess pressure by pressing the pressure deflation button D if equipped until the proper pressure reading is reached This option is only functional when using the air only hose G Press the on off button B to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage Unplug the power plug H from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Disconnect the air only hose G from the tire valve stem by turning it counterclockwise and replace the tire valve stem cap Replace the air only hose G and the power plug H and cord back in its original location Place the equipment in the original storage location in the vehicle 5 85 Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister To remove the sealant canister 1 Unwrap the sealant hose The tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of its housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses balls etc Without Pressur
134. and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle s designed app
135. and the key is in the ignition all the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock Liftgate Liftglass A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or liftglass open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate or liftglass e Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your climate control system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle See Climate Control System in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust on page 2 37 Liftgate Release To unlock the liftgate use the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 The liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is unlocked Press the button on the liftglass to open it To open the entire liftgate lift the handle located in the center of the liftgate When the liftgate is opened the liftglass will lock after a short delay Emergency Release for Opening Liftgate 1 Remove the trim plug located on the inside of the liftgate in the center to expose the access hole in the trim panel
136. anty Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 15 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Inspect the vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire if the vehicle has one See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 If the vehicle has a spare tire check to make sure it is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 88 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 68 At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check ACAUTION Starter Switch Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough 1 Befo
137. arable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash Check to make sure that you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured If there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instru
138. ark on page 2 34 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of P Park before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of P Park 2 35 Shifting Out of Park The vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P Park with the shift lever button fully released and Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P Park unless the ignition is in ON RUN and the regular brake pedal is applied The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 5 39 for more information To shift out of P Park use the following 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Press the shift lever button 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position 2 36 If you still are unable to shift out of P Park 1 Fully release the shift lever button 2 Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever button again 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still cannot move the shift lever from P Park consult your dealer retai
139. arts See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 120 for your vehicle s engine code Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts The label has the following information Vehicle Identification Number VIN Model designation Paint information e Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle 5 111 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain the vehicle battery even if the vehicle is not operating The vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 68 5 112 Headlamps The headlamp wiring is protected by four fuses An electrical overload will cause a lamp to go on and off If this happens have the headlamp wiring checked right away Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the
140. ash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR GM will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use See also OnStar System on page 2 43 in this manual for more information Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system use of the system may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and other trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology i
141. astic on the vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 107 5 107 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer If the vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polish
142. at will move to the stored memory position 2 Adjust the seat to the desired exit position 3 Press and hold the easy exit seat button for more than three seconds A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored for the selected button 1 or 2 To repeat the procedure for a second driver follow the preceding steps but press the other numbered memory control button To recall the easy exit seat position Press the easy exit seat button on the memory control while the vehicle is in P Park The seat will move to the stored exit position Or if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the Driver Information Center DIC removing the key from the ignition will move the seat to the exit position See Easy Exit Seat under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 56 for more information on activating this feature in the DIC If an easy exit seat position has not been stored the default position is all the way rearward Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks ACAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving ACAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there
143. ata about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a cr
144. ator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again repeat these steps This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not the engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal If the vehicle has this feature you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals The vehicle must be in P Park for this feature to operate The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the steering column a Press the switch forward or backward to move the pedals closer or farther away from you 2 23 Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up in cold weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C Vehicles with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting the vehicle An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 0 F 18 C To Use the
145. ave finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 107 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 38 There may also be a light that comes on in the instrument panel to let you know if the gas cap is not properly installed See Check Gas Cap Light on page 3 47 for more information A CAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer retailer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 38 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood Z CAUTION A CAUTION Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can
146. ay Dial The system responds with Say a number to send tones followed by a tone Say the number to send If the system clearly recognizes the number it responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues If the system is not sure it recognized the number properly it responds Dial Number Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Send name tag The system responds with Say aname tag to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to send e If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues If the system is not sure it recognized the name tag properly it responds Dial lt name tag gt Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in vehicle Bluetooth system it will be retained indefinitely This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and phone pairing information For in
147. beep sounds followed by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep sounds after four seconds S LIST EMPTY displays indicating the song list has been deleted If a CD is ejected and the song list contains saved tracks from that CD those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list Any tracks saved to the song list again are added to the bottom of the list To end song list mode press the SONG LIST button One beep sounds and S LIST is removed from the display Playing an MP3 WMA CD R Disc The vehicle s radio system may have the MP3 WMA feature If it has this feature it is capable of playing an MP3 WMA CD R disc For more information on how to play an MP3 WMA CD R disc see Using an MP3 on page 3 80 later in this section CD Messages CHECK CD If this message displays and or the CD ejects it could be for one of the following reasons Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play The road is very rough When the road becomes smoother the CD should play The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There could have been a problem while burning the CD The label could be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer If the radio displays an er
148. both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs and capacity weights Please note your vehicle s Certification Tire label or consult your dealer for additional details ACAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your vehicle s weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stac
149. brakes off and on To shift to the 2 Second position you Must first press the large button on the shift handle While the button is pressed move the shifter in the 2 Second position You can also use 2 Second for starting the vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces 1 First This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 2 Second without using the brakes You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in 1 First while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough To shift to the 1 First position you must first press the large button on the shift handle While the button is pressed move the shifter in the 1 First position 2 28 Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Four Wheel Drive If the vehicle has four wheel drive the engine s driving power can be sent to all four wheels for extra traction Read the following before using four wheel drive to become familiar with its operation You should use Two Wheel High for most normal driving conditions Notice Driving on clean dry pavement in Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Driv
150. call the memory settings do one of the following Press and release button 1 or 2 while the vehicle is in P Park A single chime will sound and the memory position will be recalled e If programmed to do so through the Driver Information Center DIC pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will recall the preset driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals position The numbers on the back of the transmitters 1 or 2 correspond to the numbers on the memory controls e If programmed to do so through the DIC placing the key in the ignition will recall the driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals positions 1 5 See Seat Recall under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 56 for more information To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at any time press one of the memory buttons or power seat controls Easy Exit Seat The control for the easy exit seat function is located on the driver s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2 The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall the desired driver s seat position when exiting or entering the vehicle The power lumbar recline and adjustable pedals if equipped positions will not be stored or recalled when using the easy exit seat function The seat position can be saved for up to two drivers To store the easy exit seat position 1 Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory control for less than three seconds The se
151. cators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 69 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 72 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 5 59 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregu
152. cause the traction control system has been continuously active do not allow the wheel s of one axle to spin excessively This could lead to damage to the transfer case and costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty Notice If the wheel s of one axle is allowed to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ABS and brake warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are displayed the transfer case could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and messages are displayed Vehicles without a DIC StabiliTrak system activates using engine speed management brake traction control and or stability control StabiliTrak system is disabled due to a system fault Off StabiliTrak system is disabled due to a failure to initialize StabiliTrak may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens a reduction in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may be heard This is normal If cruise control is being used when the system activates the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise control will automatically disengage Cruise control may be reengaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 3 10 StabiliTrak will turn off automatically if a problem is detected in the system The Stabi
153. ce laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a dealer retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Ge
154. ch could damage the tank if it is completely full Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your Compartment Overview on windshield washer It can damage the vehicle s page 5 12 for reservoir windshield washer system and paint location 5 34 Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for DOT 3 the location of the reservoir AR There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down e The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear When new linings are installed the fluid level goes back up A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level Have the brake hydraulic system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well Do not top off the brake fluid Adding fluid does not correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION If too much brake fluid is added it can spill on the engine and burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and the vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only w
155. child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 64 for additional information When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle Wherever a child restraint is installed be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in acrash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need
156. ck if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle s safety belts This may damage these parts If necessary move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled This could damage the safety belt or the seat Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position before folding the seat 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Pull the strap at the center of the seat where the seat cushion meets the seatback This will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out of the way Lift the flap to expose the anchors and then lower the seat cushion See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 11 for additional information Be sure the cushion is locked into place 1 3 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 4 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors 1 47 2 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top te
157. cle before it can be used See the cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone If a Bluetooth phone is not connected calls will be made using OnStar Hands Free Calling if available Refer to the OnStar owner s guide for more information Pairing Information Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving The in vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first available paired cell phone in the order the phone was paired Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the in vehicle Bluetooth system at a time Pairing should only need to be completed once unless changes to the pairing information have been made or the phone is deleted To link to a different paired phone see Linking to a Different Phone later in this section Pairing a Phone A Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say Pair The system responds with instructions and a four digit PIN number The PIN number will be used in Step 4 Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle Reference the cell phone manufacturers user guide for information on this process Locate the device named General Motors in the list on
158. cle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Loading The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly CH Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune to another channel CH Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package CH Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button CH Unavl This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Info No artist song title category or text information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly Not Found There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly XM Locked The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM
159. cted and the stop button has not been pressed twice If the disc has been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed twice the disc resumes play at the beginning Ejecting a Disc DVD Player without Sunroof Press the Ill amp button on the DVD player faceplate to eject the disc There is not an eject button on the remote control lf a disc is ejected from the player but is not removed the DVD player reloads the disc after a short period of time The disc is stored in the DVD player The DVD player does not resume play of the disc automatically Ejecting a Disc DVD Player with Sunroof Press and hold the Il 4 button for more than two seconds on the DVD player faceplate to eject the disc There is not an eject button on the remote control If a disc is ejected from the player but is not removed the DVD player reloads the disc after a short period of time The disc is stored in the DVD player The DVD player does not resume play of the disc automatically Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window below the video screen and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light can affect the ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight can also affect the function of t
160. cted to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the crash This will help guard against post crash legal action If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the crash They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insuran
161. curity light comes on there may be a problem with your theft deterrent system Turn the ignition off and try again lf the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 113 If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer retailer who can service the theft deterrent system and have a new key made It is possible for the theft deterrent system decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for programming additional keys only Canadian Owners If you lose or damage your keys only a dealer retailer can service the theft deterrent system to have new keys made To program additional keys you will require two current driver s keys To program a new key do the following 1 Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it 2 Insert the current driver s key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer retailer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the second current driver s key in the ignition and start the engine within ten seconds of removing the previous key If the engine will not start
162. d side of the driver seat On vehicles with power seats the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats C_J To adjust the seat e Move the seat forward or rearward using the Turn the kn incr r r lumbar n horizontal control urn the knob to increase or decrease lumbar support e Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion using the front of the horizontal control e Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion using the rear of the horizontal control e Raise or lower the entire seat using the entire horizontal control For seats with power reclining seatbacks see Power Reclining Seatbacks under Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 7 Power Lumbar On vehicles with power lumbar the control is located on the outboard side of the seat To increase or decrease support hold the control forward or rearward Heated Seats Your vehicle may have heated front seats The buttons used to control this KE Sr feature are located on the a front door armrests The ae engine must be running Val for the heated seat feature Sy to work To heat the entire seat press the horizontal button with the heated seat and seatback symbol Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seat off The indicator lights above the button will come on to designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for
163. d the transmission could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground 4 41 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles A CAUTION Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park The driver or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N Neutral 5 Shift the transfer case to Neutral See Shifting into Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 6 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four wheel drive vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the front wheels onto the dolly 3 Shift the transmission to P Park 4 Firmly set the parking brake 4 42 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the dolly Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF After towing see Shifting Out of Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 Rear Towing Rear Wheels Off the Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Ground Use the following procedure to dolly tow a two wheel drive vehicle from the rear 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly
164. d forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased StabiliTrak System The vehicle has the StabiliTrak system which combines antilock brake traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions Traction control activates when the controller senses wheel spin StabiliTrak will selectively apply the brakes and reduce engine torque to help regain traction Stability control activates when the controller senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is travelling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to help guide the vehicle in the intended direction When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle If driving condit
165. d service work done Make sure there is enough fuel that fluid levels are where they should be and that the spare tire if the vehicle has one is fully inflated Be sure to read all the information about four wheel drive vehicles in this manual Make sure all underbody shields if the vehicle has them are properly attached Know the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving or check with law enforcement people in the area Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will be on private land Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving A CAUTION e Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle The heaviest things should be on the floor forward of the rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can Be sure t
166. d unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to ON RUN The locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current auto lock unlock setting will not be modified See your dealer for more information Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle may have this feature You can lock the rear doors so they cannot be opened from the inside by passengers To use one of these locks do the following 1 Open one of the rear doors You will find a security lock lever located on the inside edge of each rear door 2 Move the lever down to engage the security lock Move the lever up to disengage the security lock y a amp 5 3 Close the door The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside while this feature is in use If you want to open the rear door while the security lock is on unlock the door and open the door from the outside Lockout Protection This feature stops the power door locks from locking when the key is in the ignition and a door is open to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
167. damaged Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and the transmission in N Neutral slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the P Park mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to P Park Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit check the sealant expiration date printed on the instruction label of the kit at least once a year See your dealer retailer for a replacement canister Recommended Fluids and Usage Fuser Lubricants Chassis Lubricant i EH Barking Brake GM Part No U S 12377985 Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part Cabl Z id in Canada 88901242 or lubricant number or specification can be obtained from your aP S U
168. days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 or call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or write to Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Online Owner Center Online Owner Center U S www gmownercenter com gmc Information and services customized for your specific vehicle all in one convenient place Digital owner manual warranty information and more Online service and maintenance records Find GMC dealers for service nationwide Exclusive privileges and offers e Recall notices for your specific vehicle OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links GMC www gmc com GMC Merchandise www gmccollection com Help Center www gmc com helpcenter FAQ Contact Us My GM Canada Canada www gm ca My GM Canada is a password protected section of www gm ca where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use ha
169. ded weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself Before starting check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connectors lamps tires and mirror adjustments If the trailer has electric brakes start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This checks the electrical connection at the same time During the trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer Because the rig is longer it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane 4 53 Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle The vehicle could be damaged Avo
170. der press and hold 6 RDM for two seconds A beep sounds and DISC RDM displays This feature does not work with playlists When in random press and release either SEEK arrow to go to the next or previous random track Press and release 6 RDM again to turn off random play NO RDM displays lt I SEEK gt Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the previous track Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the start of the next track Press either SEEK arrow for more than two seconds to search the previous or next tracks at two tracks per second Release the button to stop searching and to play the track lt I TUNEL Turn to fast track reverse or advance through the tracks in all folders or playlists The track number and file name displays for each track Turn lt TUNEL while in random to fast track reverse or advance the tracks in sequential order DISPL Display Press to switch between track mode folder playlist mode and time of day mode The display shows only eight characters but there can be up to four pages of text If there are more than eight characters in the song folder or playlist name they are displayed if DISPL is not pressed again pressing DISPL within two seconds goes to the next display mode Track mode displays the current track number and the ID3 tag song name e Folder playlist mode displays the current folder or playlist number and the folder playlist name Time of day mode displays
171. different features Surface Conditions Off roading surfaces can be hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle s steering acceleration and braking in different ways Depending on the surface slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances can occur Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Some things to consider Is the path ahead clear Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead Does the travel take you uphill or downhill Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When driving over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands When driving over bumps rocks or other obstacles the wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking Off roading requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed lim
172. ding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys ACAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though the airbag is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if The right front passenger seat is unoccupied The system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat The system determines that a small child i
173. disengage Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal Move the cruise switch to O Shift the transmission to N Neutral Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off Headlamps The exterior lamps knob is located on the instrument panel O Off Turn the knob to this symbol and release it to turn off the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the Automatic Headlamps AHS An indicator is lit when the position is selected This position is not available for vehicles first sold in Canada ZO Automatic DRL AHS Places the system into automatic headlamp mode 700 Parking Lamps Turns on the parking lamps as well as the following Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights ED Headlamps Turns on the headlamps as well as the following e Parking Lamps e Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights 3 13 Headlamps on Reminder A reminder tone sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on if the driver s door is open and the ignition is in LOCK OFF or ACC ACCESSORY To turn the tone off turn the knob all the way counterclockwise In the automatic mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in LOCK OFF Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps
174. ds 3 23 To change the current air delivery mode select one of the following 7 Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets Wi Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air is directed toward the windshield and side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets Some air also comes out of the defroster and side window outlets The recirculation button cannot be selected in floor mode Pal Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the floor and windshield outlets W Front Defrost Press the front defrost button to clear the windows of fog or frost more quickly The system automatically controls the fan speed if defrost is selected from AUTO mode If the outside temperature is 40 F 4 C or warmer the air conditioning compressor runs automatically to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear 3 24 A C Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off When the system is on the system automatically begins to cool and dehumidify the air inside of the vehicle The air conditioning symbol appears on the display when the air conditioning is on and turns off when the air conditioning is off If the air conditioning is turned off while in front defrost
175. e sequence Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component 5 113 a i 42 43 33 F a N 1S m ERE 39 40 Fuses Electrically Controlled Air Passenger Side Low Beam Suspension Headlamp Passenger Side High Beam Back Up Trailer Lamps Headlamp C Fuses TT Use O e Driver Side Low Beam Headlamp e Active Transfer Case 9 Windshield Washer Canister 24 Instrument Panel Cluster Driver Information Center Fuses Usage Interlock 5 115 Fuses Use Body Controller 1 Electric Adjustable Pedals ic Adj System Relays Usage Rear Window Wiper Washer 5 116 Relays Usage Electric Adjustable Pedal Powertrain 65 far Solenoid Instrument Panel Battery Rear Underseat Fuse Block X c lt K K CX NNU OBL Jeg BVH iq 91984 Jog d1904 HH mB el OMY I HMd XNY 8 N 9v soel Jag JOOENNS pz BEN K zoal fio EDEL l g ona VA gi dT Hud N pas 2 E o O gt 3 0 a SE He 43 al EB CX sz MOOINA san Mot Jer yai EA DIVE Hu a BA Jot MEV H1 p OWAH HE Joy A eat K Mis m 4 co x T T i Jee Hadim EH gy oa iG 20 DOI HH Jeo am SHOOG L ANN Jeo 10
176. e 3 38 Manual Lumbar Controls cccccceceeeeeeeeeees 1 3 Man al Seats ord es 1 2 Memory Seat essen rr ere a E EEA 1 5 Message DIC Warnings and Messages W u seseerereee 3 51 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview secsec 2 39 Manual Rearview Mirror cccceeeeeeeeeeee 2 39 Outside Convex Mirror ccccceeee cece eeeeeeee 2 42 Mirrors cont Outside Heated Mirrors ccccc ec eeeceeeeeees 2 42 Outside Manual Mirrors cccccceceeeeeeeees 2 41 Outside Power Mirrors ccccceeseeeeeeeeees 2 42 E ee AEE E otect ds race EE E E 3 80 MYGMLINKCOM rarere laweedeclicehcyecsis 7 5 Navigation System Privacy sssseeeereererere 7 18 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual ceeeeeeeeeee eee 3 86 New Vehicle Break In cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 20 OQOOMEIER cscecaccsstdcacwentatucdenmaaseatiOidondmesentend ane 3 29 Odometer Trip rn re ivecdisdiaveeeciees 3 29 Off Road Driving cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeea teers 4 13 Off Road RECOVERY ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 4 12 Oil Change Engine Oil Light ceeeeeeeeee ee 3 43 ENGINE siota an site deatons action cate RED 5 15 Pressure GAGS eniai meegroeit pi niea 3 42 Oil Engine Oil Life System W ssseeeerererereee 5 18 Older Children Restraints ccecceeeeeeee es 1 32 Online Owner Center ccccc cece eeeeeeeeee
177. e Low for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle s powertrain Do not drive on clean dry pavement in Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive Low for extended periods of time Notice If you continually drive your vehicle with the transfer case in AUTO or Four Wheel Drive you could shorten the life of the transfer case or the Four Wheel Drive system The selector switch should be left in Two Wheel Drive High mode Only use AUTO and Four Wheel Drive when you need extra traction such as in wet or slippery road conditions Automatic Transfer Case lf the vehicle has four wheel drive the transfer case knob is located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel Use this knob to shift into and out of four wheel drive O oOo O AUTO 4t 21 Two Wheel High This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations The front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive This provides the best fuel economy AUTO Automatic Four Wheel Drive This setting is ideal for use when road conditions are variable When driving the vehicle in automatic four wheel drive the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels When the vehicle senses a loss of traction the system will automatically engage four wheel drive Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than Two Wheel High 41 Four Wheel High This setting should be used when you need e
178. e With Pressure Deflation Deflation Button Button 2 Press the canister release button 3 Pull up and remove the canister 4 Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer retailer 5 Push the new canister into place 5 86 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 3 Remove the straps Storage The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the floor storage compartment at the rear of the vehicle 1 Open the liftgate See Liftgate Liftglass on page 2 12 2 Open the rear floor storage lid See Rear Floor Storage Cover on page 2 53 4 Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from the storage compartment 5 Remove tire sealant and compressor kit from the storage bag The tire sealant and compressor kit is attached to the floor with two straps Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in P Park If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in Neu
179. e a tire with air only and not sealant 5 83 3 Place the kit on the ground Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it 4 Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise 5 Attach the air only hose G onto the tire valve stem by turning it clockwise until it is tight 6 Plug the power plug H into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 18 If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet do not use the cigarette lighter If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter use the Always do a safety check first See f a Tire Goes Flat cigarette lighter on page 5 76 Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or 1 Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its window storage location See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage on page 5 87 2 Unwrap the air only hose G and the power plug H 5 84 7 Start the vehicle The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor 8 Turn the selector switch A clockwise to the Air Only position 9 Press the on off B button to turn the compressor on The compressor will inflate the tire with air only 10 Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gage C The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire
180. e and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5 54 for additional information GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 68 for information on proper tire rotation ACAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on your vehicle s wheels ACAUTION If you use bias ply tires on the vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of d
181. e carrier to work 1 While on a call press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Three way call The system responds with Three way call please say dial or call 3 Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called 4 Once the call is connected press to link all the callers together Ending a Call To end a call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say End Call The call is then ended Muting a Call During a call all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them To Mute a call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Mute Call The system responds with Call muted To Cancel Mute 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Mute Call The system responds with Resuming call 3 93 Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Transfer Call The system responds with Transferring call and the audio will switch from the vehicle to the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the In Vehicle Bl
182. e cautions A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty and it could be costly The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words CAUTION or Notice Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator I This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information Vehicle Symbol Chart ED Fuel Gage Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean For more information on the symbol refer to the index 4 Fuses D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer gt i SY Adjustable Pedals LATCH System Child Restraints me Apad Readiness Tign O Malfunction Indicator Lamp Air Conditioning Y Oil Pressure Antilock Brake System ABS Power e MA Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar Q Remote Vehicle Start Q ing Ligh Brake system Warning Light A Safety Belt Reminders C
183. e center to move it up or down and side to side The day night adjustment lets you adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind you Move the lever to the right for nighttime use and to the left for daytime use Vehicles with OnStar have three control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror See your dealer retailer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar See OnStar System on page 2 43 for more information on the services OnStar provides Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror with a compass and or temperature display See Compass on page 2 40 for more information about the compass display See Temperature Display after in this section Vehicles with OnStar have three control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror See your dealer retailer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar See OnStar System on page 2 43 for more information on the services OnStar provides D On Off Press to turn the dimming feature on or off TEMP Temperature Press to turn the temperature display on or off Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is started Temperature Display Press or depending on the mirror press TEMP to turn the temperatur
184. e controls on or off VBA Fan Control Press to increase or decrease the fan speed V 4 Air Delivery Mode Control Press to change the direction of airflow panel bi level or floor to the rear seat area The rear control only turns on if the front climate control system is on and not in defrost mode Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that explains what to do Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous 3 27 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You will know how fast you are going about how much fuel you have used and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
185. e display This mode shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either miles or kilometers To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information press and hold the select button for one second while in one of the trip modes This will reset the information for TRIP A or TRIP B You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they are displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster lf you press and hold the reset stem or the select button for more than four seconds the display will show the distance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B Tire Pressures On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS press the trip information button until TIRE PRESSURES appears on the display This mode shows the tire pressure in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa Press the select button to scroll through the following information LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front driver s side tire e RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front passenger s side tire LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear driver s side tire e RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear passenger s side tire 3 49 Timer The DIC can be used as a timer Press the select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as
186. e display on or off To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius 1 Press and hold D or depending on the mirror press TEMP until either a flashing F or C appears 2 Press D or TEMP again to change the display to the desired unit of measurement After approximately four seconds of inactivity the new unit locks in and the display returns 2 39 If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an extended period of time please consult your dealer retailer Under certain circumstances a delay in updating the temperature is normal Passenger Airbag Indicator The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag indicator on the mirror glass just above the buttons If the vehicle has this feature the mirror displays the word ON or an airbag symbol in Canada when the passenger airbag is enabled For more information see Passenger Sensing System on page 1 64 Cleaning the Mirror Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror Use a soft towel dampened with water Compass Compass Operation There is a compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror Press or depending on the mirror press COMP to turn the compass on or off 2 40 Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if After several seconds the display does not show a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna m
187. e front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off This warns others that you are having trouble Press again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on the vehicle s turn signals will not work Horn To sound the horn press the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad Tilt Wheel The tilt lever is on the outboard side of the steering column under the turn signal lever 1 Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you to change the position then release the lever to lock Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals 20 D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Flash to Pass Feature Windshield Wipers e Windshield Washer e 9 Cruise Control Information for these features is on the pages following Turn and Lane Change Signals gt Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change Hold it there until the lane change is complete The lever returns to its starting position when it is released If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on a signal bulb could be burned out Have the bulbs replaced
188. e harness contains the following trailer circuits Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal Brown Running Lamps e White Ground Light Green Back up Lamps Red Battery Feed Dark Blue Electric Brakes If towing a light duty trailer with a standard four way round pin connector an adapter connector is available from your dealer retailer If charging a remote non vehicle battery turn on the headlamps to boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery The vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electric trailer brake controller These wires are located inside the vehicle on the driver side under the instrument panel These wires should be connected to an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center 4 57 42 NOTES 4 58 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE nsina a erne EEA 5 3 Accessories and Modifications ee 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 066 5 4 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 Doing Your Own Service Work 28 5 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle che ap DELE ratios ED ned a 5 5 UG EE act A E A E EA T 5 5 Gasoline Octane s eiicsisreisiniesenrernininis anisses 5 5 Gasoline Specifications sssssenereeeererereee 5 6 California Fuel 12422 psici eds iiinis 5 6 AGOIIVGS roende esa ra eE EA SR 5 6 Fuel
189. e ignition system and the vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get the tailpipe under water If the tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start the engine When going through water remember that when the brakes get wet it might take longer to stop See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4 25 After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage The vehicle requires more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night driving tips include Drive defensively Do not drink and drive e Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead e Watch for animals When tired pull off the road Do not wear sunglasses Avoid staring directly
190. e serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Head Restraints Pull the head restraint up to raise it ST To lower the head restraint press the button located on the top of the seatback and push the head restraint down Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Rear Seats Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the i safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts Rear Seat Operation and return them to their normal stowed position Your vehicle has flip and fold second row seats which petore folding a rear seat provide additional cargo space To flip and fold the seat s do the following 2 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seatback and fold the seatback forward The head restraint will automatically fold out of the way as the seatback is folded down 1 Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion meets the seatback and flip the seat cushion forward To return the seat s to the original position do the following A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudde
191. e the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench and socket end of the extension to tighten the cable Return the equipment to the proper location in the vehicle as shown next 5 101 A Handle E Knob B Wheel Wrench F Wheel Blocks C Instruction Label and Jack D Extension s 1 Attach the handle A wheel wrench B and extension D in the slots provided 2 Roll up the instruction label C and return to the slot in the tool kit 3 Assemble the wheel blocks F to the jack 4 Turn the knob E on the jack clockwise to raise the jack head 5 Return the rear seat to its proper position 5 102 Spare Tire This vehicle may have a spare tire Although the spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5 92 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 100 After installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is correctly inflated The spare tire is made to perform well at speeds up to 70 mph 112 km h at the recom
192. e track number and song title displays 1 FLD V Previous Folder Press to go to the first track in the previous folder Press 1 FLD V while in folder random mode to go to the first track in the previous folder and random the tracks in that folder 2FLDA Next Folder Press to go to the first track in the next folder Press 2 FLD A while in folder random mode to go to the first track in the next folder and random the tracks in that folder 3 REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse quickly within a track Press and hold 3 REV for less than two seconds to reverse at 10 times the normal playing speed Press and hold 3 REV for more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed Release 3 REV to play the passage REV and the elapsed time of the track displays 4 FWD Forward Press and hold to advance quickly within a track Press and hold 4 FWD for less than two seconds to advance at 10 times the normal playing speed Press and hold 4 FWD for more than two seconds to advance at 20 times the normal playing speed Release 4 FWD to play the passage FWD and the elapsed time of the track displays 6 RDM Random Press and release to play the tracks of a current folder or playlist in random order FLDR RDM displays Once all of the tracks a current folder or playlist have played the system Moves on to the next folder or playlist and play all of the tracks in random order To play all tracks on the CD in random or
193. e vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information How OnStar Service Works The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle information This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed the emergency button is pressed or if the airbags or AACN system deploy This information usually includes the vehicle s GPS location and in the event of a crash additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle was involved in e g the direction from which the vehicle was hit When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling is used the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle s GPS location so they can provide services where it is located OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage network capacity and reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times 2 45 Location information about the vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and ava
194. ealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada and extended powertrain warranty in both the U S and Canada Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required 7 10 Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the followin
195. ean rag or paper towel The automatic transmission dipstick handle with this symbol on it is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the au EHTS vehicle See Engine C i tO 5 12 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower i CE be On par eas een PAJE o level The fluid level must be in the COLD area or more information on location below the cross hatched area for a cold check or 2 Reinstall it back in all the way wait three seconds in the HOT or cross hatched area for a hot check and then pull it back out again If the dipstick does Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an not go down the tube easily turn the blade and accurate reading try again until it is fully inserted in the tube 4 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range reinstall the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 5 23 Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If inconsistent readings persist contact your dealer retailer How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference
196. eaner Filter KEY i See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 80 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change 5 20 How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter by removing it the from the vehicle and lightly shaking the filter to release loose dust and dirt If the filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Remove the screws on the engine air cleaner filter and lift off the cover 2 Remove the air cleaner filter from the housing Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible 3 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter 4 Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws ACAUTION Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Notice If the air cleaner
197. earance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your dealer retailer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comp
198. eat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 30 for more information This message displays and a chime sounds if the cooling system temperature gets hot See Engine Overheating on page 5 30 for the proper course of action This message clears when the coolant temperature drops to a safe operating temperature FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low Refuel as soon as possible See Low Fuel Warning Light on page 3 47 Filling the Tank on page 5 8 and Fuel on page 5 5 for more information ICE POSSIBLE This message may display if the outside temperature reaches a level where ice could form on the roadway Adjust your driving accordingly If the temperature rises to a safe level the message clears This message clears itself after 10 seconds or you can manually clear it from the DIC display KEY FOB BATTERY LOW This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low Replace the battery in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see i
199. ed the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed Ask your dealer retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle 4 46 Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section and see your dealer retailer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly The following information has many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer Pulling A Trailer Here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure the rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police
200. eeeeeeee 5 49 Replacement Bulbs c seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 49 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 50 MIKES sepcccahiascaschenabeaaeanieiesnelec sa renhed 5 53 Tire Sidewall Labeling eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 54 Tire Terminology and Definitions 0 0 5 57 Inflation Tire Pressure ceceeeeeeeeee eee ee 5 60 High Speed Operation ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 62 Tire Pressure Monitor System 6 eeeeeees 5 63 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Tire Pressure Monitor Operation Tire Inspection and Rotation sssssererere When It Is Time for New Tires 00065 Buying New Tires cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeees Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 0006 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeeeees Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Wheel Replacement eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Tike CHAINS sess seccscensmocssanadmacdecs einne iee kaei If a Tire Goes Flat orne rer Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 005 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage Changing a Flat Tire 254440 serve pucis nisinsin Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare WMC mcc ce7 tac area NE Secondary Latch System eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 Spare Wi
201. eeeeeeeee ben 3 14 Defensive Driving ceecseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeners 4 2 Delayed LOCKING sirener ansen bonde 2 8 Bis MIPS ste an thot heater seer SENE 3 80 Doing Your Own Service Work eeeeeeeee ees 5 4 Dome Lamp Override ccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 16 Dome LAMPS a3 c ccecisdctivacacanchantarGeuaseeancebeheains 3 16 Door Delayed Locking 2 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 2 8 LOCKS x aoise ro ears ladies 2 7 Power Door LOCKS eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeees 2 8 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 9 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeeeeees 2 11 Driver Information Center DIC eeeeeeeees 3 47 DIC Operation and Displays eeeeeeee 3 48 DIC Vehicle Customization ceeeeeeeees 3 56 DIC Warnings and Messages 6 eeeeeeee 3 51 Driving AU INQ 322eescet tees cet cheese eee 4 25 Before a Long Trip 0 seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 26 Defensive sa csceieadaincead ueinis gS E senaneiee enles 4 2 DIUNKON wiscdntimcodedacenine ineabeaapieadetun Gees aE 4 3 Highway HypnoSis sionen eres eeeee ees 4 26 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 27 In Rain and on Wet Roads eee 4 25 OTERO AGS mordsag hac tide EE ERER 4 13 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 31 VA la ILT Pesene aE N 4 28 Driving for Better Fuel Economy sasac 4 2 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 22
202. eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 4 10 SIOCHING ss a EE EE cddewetetanecuened 4 10 Off Road Recovery ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eee tenes 4 12 PASSING E henh hehe E 4 12 Loss of Control ierni niini anuman nk 4 12 Off Road DIVING aan eee es EU ania 4 13 Driving at Night lt 2 udrense dase ian 4 25 Driving Your Vehicle Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 25 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 1 4 26 Highway Hypnosis 62 als ere minarenin 4 26 Hill and Mountain Roads W u ssseeeeeeeerereeee 4 27 Winter DIVINO forsere e 4 28 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud IGE JOR SNOW hooren eee adr RENSES 4 30 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 4 31 Loading the Vehicle cceceeeeeeeeeee renee 4 31 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment 4 38 TOWING siigach Eea 4 38 Towing Your Vehicle 23 4 38 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeee 4 38 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension SYSTEM irere rer EEEa TE A S EENE 4 45 TOWING a Trailef essuie nran 4 46 Your Driving the Road and Defensive Driving the Vehicle Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to 5 wear your safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for Driving habits can affect fuel mileage Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops Avoid idling t
203. eeeeeees 5 72 High Speed Operation eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 5 62 If a Tire Goes Flat ccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 5 76 Inflation Tire Pressure inenen 5 60 Tires cont Inspection and Rotation ssssseeeererererrns 5 68 Installing the Spare Tire cceeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 92 Pressure Monitor Operation ccceeeeeeeeee 5 64 Pressure Monitor System ceeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 63 Removing the Flat Tire nnec 5 92 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 89 Secondary Latch System c eeeeeeeeee eee 5 97 Spare TiS irske ea A R 5 102 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 100 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 00 5 77 Tire Sidewall Labeling seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 54 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 57 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 2 5 72 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 74 Wheel Replacement ceeeeeeeeeeereeees 5 74 When It Is Time for New Tires ccecce 5 69 Towing Recreational Vehicle eceeeeeeeeeneeeee tees 4 38 TOWING a Traller wiceicaswenectcancacuh catenin eased anes 4 46 Yo r Vehicle erse n eceia E 4 38 Traction StabiliTrak System 0 cccccccceeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 Transmission Fluid Automatic ccccceeee eee eee eet eeeeeeenees 5 21 Transmission Operation Automatic 5 2 25 Tip OdOMETER sare sac taceudictebew
204. eees 5 46 Back Up Lamp cic icsectesscisicasebacacnestiacandes eters 5 48 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps siemenannos 5 47 Halogen Bulbs 205 anser 5 46 Bulb Replacement cont Headlamp Almind 2 0 0 cc ceeseeerecteveadesataeniees 5 45 Headlamps aar Reece a ated enes 5 46 License Plate Lamps eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 49 Replacement Bulbs cceeeeeeeeeee tener eee 5 49 Taillamps Turn Signal and Stoplamps 5 47 Buying New TireS nn anes hederne 5 70 Calibration sas cisettawtetghe hen air here nere be 2 40 California Fuel ssciconccncaheatseachernesecnernancacymeamaaes 5 6 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 California Proposition 65 Warning 5 4 Camadian Qwne rs cicicicccare ninii reaa iois ii Capacities and Specifications 8 5 120 Carbon Monoxide ccceseeeeeeee 2 12 2 37 4 28 Care of Safety Belts 2 00 0 cece ceee eee eeee teeta eeaeeeees 5 106 Cargo COVER ne ENE e aiana iaa eee ele 2 54 Cargo Tie DOWNS 5 22k oiner r eks abs 2 55 CD MPS ernan EE a E EEE 3 80 Center Console Storage Area ssseeeereeree 2 52 Chains TIe 2 2 minen a a aaia 5 76 Charging System Light 2 222 432 zl reeks silke nerne 3 33 Check Engine Lam ph susende aen nn aE 3 38 Gages Warning Light W u ssssseeeeeererereenene 3 45 Check Gas Cap Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 47 Checking Things Under the Hood
205. eeneaes 7 5 OnStar PriVaCy tse2c2ci nev sencesasystssdivecs si ae deve 7 18 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 43 Operation Universal Home Remote System 2 47 Outlet Adjustment ceeeee eee eee eeee eee eeneee tenes 3 26 Outlets Accessory POWET 02 eeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 Outside Gonvex Mirtor ssceesievessclsliesgehiniedaies can ences 2 42 Heated Mirrors 2 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 42 Manual MIMOS rioria qth elin elite 2 41 Power Mirrors ssi 0 6 deaascisianmuadasqeacact td maces amas 2 42 Overhead Console ccceceeeeeeeneee eee eeaeeaeeaes 2 51 Owner Checks and Services 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 8 Owners Canadian ccccccceceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees ii Paint Damage i cideceisvcadwnde seed dee aao na 5 110 Park Shifting INTO serieren aaan 2 34 SHIMN OUMON aeai a ERE SENE 2 36 Park Brake inesse ieena a a a 2 33 Parking Over Things That Burn c eeeeeeeeeeneee tenes 2 36 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 32 Passenger Sensing System ceeeeeeeeneee ees 1 64 PASSING zarina Presley ohuasauelcu cus deesader 4 12 PASS Key III Electronic Immobilizer 2 18 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation siivtes cecchis coe nae netic ee 2 18 Passlock geld aL ed ede menneskene 2 17 Perchlorate Materials Requirements California 522 hanke agnen 5 4 Pho
206. eere renerne renee 2 52 Universal Home Remote System 2 46 Rear Floor Storage Cover G Gd u sssseeeeeeeeeereerenee 2 53 Universal Home Remote System Operation Convenience NOt ur ris cassetanandqeseee sinners 2 54 With One Triangular LED 2 2 47 Cargo Cover sdk aceaboneabwead sien cca FEER ERNE sarees 2 54 Cargo Tie DOWNS c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee aiie 2 55 Storage Areas eeen rererere 2 51 GOVE BOK erases ldo EEN 2 51 SUNTOOR neeaae enag 2 55 Overhead Console 22253 eres ere stas 2 51 Center Console Storage u sssseeverererereee 2 52 Keys ACAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children This vehicle has keys that can be used for the ignition and door lock that will fit with either side up When a new vehicle is delivered the dealer retailer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number The key code number tells your dealer retailer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys Keep this number in a safe place If you lose your keys you will be able to have new ones made ea
207. ehicle See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 69 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates A CAUTION Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system 1 68 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from wo
208. ehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check the transmitter s battery See Battery Replacement later in this section If the transmitter is still not working correctly see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions work up to 30 feet 9 m away from the vehicle There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 4 rt Unlock Press once to unlock the driver door The parking lamps flash and the interior lights come on Press M a second time within three seconds to unlock all the doors To program different feedback settings through the Driver Information Center DIC see Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 47 Lock Press to lock all the doors Press again within three seconds and the horn chirps Panic Press to sound the horn The headlamps and taillamps flash for up to 30 seconds To turn it off press again or wait 30 seconds or start the vehicle Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer retailer When the replacement transmitter is prog
209. el This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system are only affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay lf the vehicle is started in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system comes on after the transmission is shifted out of P Park Once the vehicle leaves the garage it takes about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay the instrument panel cluster might not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position If the vehicle is running and the automatic headlamp system is already on it can be turned off by turning and releasing the headlamp control at the off position The automatic headlamp system stays off until you turn and release the headlamp control at the off position again See Headlamps on page 3 13 Fog Lamps The fog lamp button is located on the instrument panel to the right of the exterior lamps knob Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions The ignition must be in ON RUN for the fog lamps to work 4D Press to turn the fog lamps on or off An indicator light turns on near the button
210. el oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 5 57 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production op
211. el wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 3 Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise three or four turns 4 Repeat this procedure at least two times If the spare tire lowers to the ground continue with Step 2 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 89 5 Turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 6 Attach the jack handle extension s and the wheel wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle towards the front of the rear bumper Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire 7 Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting 5 98 8 Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack 9 Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable 10 Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand 11 If the spare tire is hanging from the cable insert the socket end of the extension into the hoist shaft hole on a 45 degree angle downward 12 Be sure that t
212. elect a setting and move on to the next feature press I while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 16 for more information Language Press 1 until LANGUAGE ENGLISH appears in the display To select your preference for display language press lt while LANGUAGE ENGLISH is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRANCAIS All messages will appear in French ESPANOL All messages will appear in Spanish To select a setting and move on to the next feature press I while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC If you accidentally choose a language that you do not want or understand press and hold 1 and the trip information button at the same time The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages in their particular language English will be in English Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in Spanish When you see the language that you would like release both buttons The DIC will then display the information in the language you chose You can also scroll through the different languages by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds as long as you are in the odometer mode 3 61 Units Press i until UNITS U S ENGLISH appears in the display To select the units of measurement in which the DIC will display vehicle information press lt lt while
213. em secured in a rear seating position We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a CAUTION Continued 1 42 CAUTION Continued forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the
214. en a short distance with the light on turn off accessories such as the radio and air conditioner 3 33 Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running but the ignition is on this gage displays the battery voltage in DC volts il 9 19 ECD When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system The gage may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading This is normal Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range The voltmeter gage may also read lower when in fuel economy mode This is normal 3 34 Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your
215. engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off If the light comes on while driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light stays on or comes on again while driving the vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on the vehicle still has brakes but not antilock 3 36 brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 35 For vehicles with a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 for all brake related DIC messages StabiliTrak Service Light This light will come on briefly when the engine is started This light will come on if a problem is detected in the StabiliTrak system For more information see StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 StabiliTrak Indicator Light This warning light should come on briefly when the engine is started During most driving conditions this light will not come on If the StabiliTrak System is actively controlling the stability and or traction of the vehicle this light will flash This is normal This light will come on if any p
216. eproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work A CAUTION You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If the wrong fasteners are used parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If doing some of your own service work use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 This vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 68 Keep a record wi
217. er belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants 1 28 To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle The belt should return to its stowed position Before a door is closed be sure the safety belt is out of the way If a door is slammed against a safety belt damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front outboard occupants Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen they are part of the safety belt assembly They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if your vehicle has side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event Pretensioners work only once If the pretensioners activate in a crash they will need to be replaced and probably other new parts for the vehicle s safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 71 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head T
218. er than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 5 64 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly if the vehicle has one The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a low tire pressure condition exists If your vehicle has the Driver Information Center DIC steering wheel control buttons tire pressure levels may also be checked through the DIC See Tire Pressures under D C Operation and Displays on page 3 48 When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light e located on the instrument panel cluster At the same time a message to check the pressure ina specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure Using the DIC tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on pa
219. ere is a problem You should see your dealer retailer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed and drive accordingly SERVICE TIRE MONITOR On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays if a part on the TPMS is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 38 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 64 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer STABILITRAK ACTIVE This message displays anytime the StabiliTrak system activates to maintain vehicle stability Any combination of engine speed management brake traction control and stability control displays this message STABILITRAK NOT READY This message may display if driving conditions delay StabiliTrak system initialization This is normal Once the system initializes this message will no longer be displayed on the DIC STABILITRAK OFF This message displays when you press the StabiliTrak button for more than five seconds or when stability control has been automatically disabled The StabiliTrak button is located on the transmission shift handle To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you
220. ered by the vehicle warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off the engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door ACAUTION Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you h
221. erene 2 53 Rear Seat Audio RSA a an 3 109 Rear Seat Entertainment System 00 3 96 Rear Seat Operation ceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 1 11 Rear Windshield Washer Wiper 0eeeeeees 3 9 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming 2 39 Rearview Mirrors ur en aE 2 39 Reclining Seatbacks u u ssseeeerererrere renere kernen 1 7 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Recreational Vehicle Towing ccecce 4 38 Reduced Engine Power Light 3 44 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 00 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Ope ratioM cynes ine O en era TEE 2 5 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 92 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 5 89 Replacement Bulbs c eceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 49 Replacement Parts Maintenance 065 6 14 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government W ssseseeeerererernere 7 15 General Motors 555 nere sa tieeddades 7 15 United States Government u ssssererereee 7 14 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems W 1 70 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash scsc civetesccareceti arini 1 71 Retained Accessory Power Uu ssssseseeeeererernnnen 2 22 Roadside Assistance Program sabeer eee 7 7 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out
222. ering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels For four wheel drive vehicles shift into Four Wheel High Turn off any traction or stability system Shift back and forth between R Reverse and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while shifting and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out If the vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 38 Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label A CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overl
223. erior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions 5 106 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or pl
224. ers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 72 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 5 55 Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size P245 75R16 109S Passenger P Metric Tire A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall 5 56 C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the passenger P Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply
225. eset stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band When a CD is playing in the CD changer press this button to go to the next available CD if multiple CDs are loaded A SOURCE Press the SOURCE arrows to switch between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 or a CD If a CD is loaded the CD symbol displays A SEEK V Press the SEEK arrows to go to the previous or the next radio station and stay there The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band When a CD is playing press the SEEK arrows to fast forward or reverse A vol Volume Press the VOL arrows to increase or to decrease the volume Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on the radio FM Stereo FM signals on
226. et you plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone The vehicle has three accessory power outlets There are two outlets located below the climate controls and one outlet is on the rear of the center floor console Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet Be sure to put the cover back on when not using the accessory power outlet Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer retailer for additional information on the accessory power outlets Notice Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter For vehicles with this feature the ashtray is removable and fits into the front cupholder Notice If papers pins or other flammab
227. f control Never try to turn around if about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle it is steep enough to cause it to roll over If you cannot make it up the hill back straight down the hill lf after stalling you try to back down the hill and decide you just cannot do it set the parking brake put your transmission in P Park and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer case to Neutral when you leave the vehicle Leave it in some gear 4 20 A CAUTION Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park This is because the Neutral position on the transfer case overrides the transmission You or someone else could be injured If you are going to leave your vehicle set the parking brake and shift the transmission to P Park But do not shift the transfer case to Neutral Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill consider How steep is the downhill Will be able to maintain vehicle control What is the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders Things not to do when driving down a hill When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill tha
228. f the message still appears on the DIC OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 15 for more information This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check the oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer See Engine Oil on page 5 15 PASSENGER DOOR AJAR This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger door is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 3 53 REAR ACCESS OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in ON RUN Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and liftglass See Liftgate Liftglass on page 2 12 Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and
229. f the transfer case on four wheel drive vehicles is in N Neutral the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 4 55 Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal while you start the engine shift into a gear and release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer See this manual s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight 4 56 Trailer Wiring Harness The vehicle may have a seven wire trailer towing harness This harness may have a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector if equipped with the trailering package that is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform or included with the four pin trailer towing harness If the vehicle is not equipped with the heavy duty trailer connector one may be purchased from your dealer retailer The seven wir
230. f them For vehicles with a winch be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck but you will want to know how to use it properly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off roading requires some new and different skills Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds Use your arms hands feet and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to control the speed At higher speeds You approach things faster and have less time to react There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles The vehicle has more bounce when driving over obstacles e More braking distance is needed especially on an unpaved surface A CAUTION When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you are driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain Be familiar with the terrain and its many
231. fications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect the vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 3 39 This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle e Reduce vehicle speed Avoid hard accelerations Avoid steep uphill grades If towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible 3 40 Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required An emission
232. following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Universal Home Remote System Operation With One Triangular LED If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode LED indicator light above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions below This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming the Universal Home Remote Keep the original hand held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Button
233. formation on how to delete this information see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags 3 95 Other Information The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 3 96 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system includes a DVD player a video display screen two sets of wireless headphones and a remote control Before You Drive The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only and is not intended for the driver while driving Parental Control This button is located behind the video scree
234. formation on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that the first service be Maintenance I the second service be Maintenance II and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often Maintenance I Use Maintenance I if the light or message displays within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I Always use Maintenance II whenever the light or message displays 10 months or more since the last service or if the light or message has not come on at all for one year Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 15 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 An Emission Control Service Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote j Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 20 See footnote k Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 68 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Mon
235. front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag lf after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer retailer for service ACAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 for more information including important safety information Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer The light should go out once the engine starts If it stays on or comes on while driving there could be a problem with the charging system A charging system message in the Driver Information Center DIC can also appear See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 for more information This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt or that there is an electrical problem Have it checked right away If the vehicle must be driv
236. g Shuttle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation Dealers may provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of the dealer s area Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary
237. ge 3 48 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s is low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Also see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 Your vehicle s TPMS can alert you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 68 and Tires on page 5 53 Notice Using non approved tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty Always use the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer retailer Factory installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved liquid tire sealant Using non approved tire sealants could damage the TPMS sensors See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit for information regarding the inflator kit materials and instructions 5 65 TPMS Malfunction Light a
238. ght front passenger A roof rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job 1 55 Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Also airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 60 Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supple
239. gine lift bracket on vehicles with the 4 2L L6 engine or the engine accessory drive bracket for vehicles with the 5 3L V8 engine and is marked GND Ground See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location 5 40 A CAUTION Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately ACAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative term
240. h can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer retailer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces lf you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or sensors replace them only with new GM original odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain right wheel wheel bolts wheel nuts and TPMS clearance to the body and chassis sensors for your vehicle See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 88 for more information ACAUTION Used Replacement Wheels Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous A CAUTION It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous control You could have a collision in which you or You cannot know how it has been used or how far others could be injured Always use the correct it has been driven It could fail suddenly and wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new
241. harging System E Tire Pressure Monitor amp Cruise Control gt Traction Control A Engine Coolant Temperature amp Windshield Washer Fluid Exterior Lamps 30 Fog Lamps Section 1 Seats and Restraint System Front Seats 0 cccececee ver ben byerne 1 2 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children Manual Seats ccs ori acts ncstitetasilecigtacedeaneke 1 2 CATCH orne a a aan 1 43 Power Seals nenese naa m ee EE EAS 1 3 Securing a Child Restraint in a Manual Lumbar sesasine rirni 1 3 Rear Outside Seat Position 1 49 Power Lumbar aisre ear DN ears 1 4 Securing a Child Restraint in the Heated Seats 1 1 W W W G ssseeeeerererener ere eeaeeaeeneeeees 1 4 Center Rear Seat Position ssss 1 51 Memory Seat Tiilinen aa E h 1 5 Securing a Child Restraint in the Reclining Seatbacks W W u ssseseeeerererere rr enenenee 1 7 Right Front Seat Position ssse 1 52 Head Restraints sarcinii paniei e 1 10 Airbag System n 1 55 Rear Se ats 15 rr 1 11 Where Are the Airbags ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 58 Rear Seat Operation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ees 1 11 When Should an Airbag Inflate 1 60 Safety Belts cer 1 13 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 1 61 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 1 13 How Does an Airbag Restrain ERE BERNER 1 62 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 18 What Will You
242. has activated Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a Satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound During your trial or when you subscribe you will get unlimited access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in the vehicle A service fee is required to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 in Canada Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 3 84 later in this section for further detail 3 72 Playing a CD Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing For the Base Radio first press the eject button or the INFO knob to insert a CD with the ignition off If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When a CD is inserted the CD symbol displays As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm
243. have rolled over If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping The best way to prevent this is to walk the course first so you know what the surface is like before driving it Stalling on an Incline ACAUTION Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline be sure you and any passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand the wheels do not get good traction Acceleration is not as quick turning is more difficult and braking distances are longer It is best to use a low gear when in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck When driving on sand wheel traction changes On loosely packed sand such as on beaches or sand dunes the tires will tend to sink into the sand This affects steering acce
244. have treadwear indicators 5 69 You need new tires if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used This is also true for the spare tire if your vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information 5 70 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performanc
245. he cleaning cloth Notice Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on the vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning the vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Products that remove odors from the vehicle s upholstery and clean the vehicle s glass can be obtained from your dealer retailer 5 103 Do not clean the vehicle using A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface A stiff brush It can cause damage to the vehicle s interior surfaces Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Use only mild neutral pH soaps Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery Organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc that can damage the
246. he damaged tire is repaired or replaced 17 Return the equipment to its original storage location in the vehicle 18 Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km to distribute the sealant in the tire 19 20 21 22 23 Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire Not Punctured If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi 68 kPa below the recommended inflation pressure stop driving the vehicle The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 If the tire pressure has not dropped more than 10 psi 68 kPa from the recommended inflation pressure inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure Wipe off any sealant from the wheel tire and vehicle Dispose of the used sealant canister E and sealant air hose F assembly at a local dealer retailer or in accordance with local state codes and practices Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer retailer After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit take the vehicle to an authorized dealer retailer within a 100 miles 161 km of driving to have the tire repaired or replaced Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire Not Punctured To use the air compressor to inflat
247. he engine for long periods of time When road and weather conditions are appropriate use cruise control if equipped Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require Keep vehicle tires properly inflated Combine several trips into a single trip Replace the vehicle s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire s sidewall near the size Follow recommended scheduled maintenance A CAUTION Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunk Driving ACAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment mu
248. he engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly the system must be reset every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it indicates that an oil change is necessary A change engine oil light comes on and if the vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on See Change Engine Oil Light on page 3 43 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally the oil must be changed at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter
249. he load is properly secured so things are not tossed around You will find other important information under Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 and Tires on page 5 53 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving and obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage shrubs flowers trees or grasses or disturb wildlife This includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Check to see if there are any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle in case something happens to one o
250. he remote control Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place 3 103 Remote Control Buttons L Set up Menu Press to adjust the color tint brightness contrast display mode and dynamic range compression The dynamic range compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase low audio produced by some DVDs 2 Audio Press to display a menu that only appears while a DVD is being played The format and content of this function will vary for each disc Fast Reverse Press to fast reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing press again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews SRCE Source Press to switch between the DVD player and an auxiliary source Power Press to turn the DVD player on and off HE Stop Press to stop playing rewinding or fast sen oc forwarding a DVD or CD Press twice to return to Title Press to return the DVD to the main the beginning of the DVD menu of the DVD v lt gt oo dl Previous Track Chapter Press to return to the A Y lt gt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the start of the current track or chapter Press again to arrows to navigate through a menu return to the previous track or chapter Th
251. he slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section For vehicles that have a radio with a Six Disc CD player see the following LOAD Press to load CDs into the CD player This CD player holds up to six CDs To insert one CD 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and release the LOAD button 3 Wait for the indicator light located to the right of the slot to turn green 4 Load a CD Insert the CD part way into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in 3 73 To insert multiple CDs 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds A beep sounds and the indicator light located to the right of the slot begins to flash and MULTI LOAD displays 3 Once the light stops flashing and turns green INSERT CD displays load a CD Insert the CD part way into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in Once the CD is loaded the indicator light begins flashing again Once the light stops flashing and turns green load another CD The CD player takes up to six CDs Do not try to load more than six To load more than one CD but less than six complete Steps 1 through 3 Whe
252. he socket end of the extension connects to the hoist shaft Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way 13 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle Notice If you drive away before the spare tire or secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled you could damage your vehicle Always reinstall this cable before driving your vehicle 14 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced 5 99 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools A CAUTION Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place 5 100 A CAUTION The underbody mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing up If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing downward its secondary latch will not work properly and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall from your vehicle If this happened when your vehicle was being driven the tire might contact a person or another vehicle causing injury and of course damage to itself as
253. he system controls the air delivery mode fan speed and temperature inside the vehicle Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode 1 Press AUTO When AUTO is selected the air conditioning and air inlet are automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run continuously when the outside temperature is over approximately 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it is hot outside the air inlet automatically changes to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down the vehicle 2 Set the driver s and passenger s temperature To find your comfort setting start with a 72 F 22 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to adjust Turn the driver or passenger side temperature knob to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If a temperature setting of 60 F 15 C is chosen the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting If a temperature setting of 90 F 32 C is chosen the system remains at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting may not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster Manual Operation O Off Press to turn off the entire climate control system Outside air still enters the vehicle and will be directed to the floor The system turns on by pressing either AUTO air delivery mode fan control or by adjusting either temperature knob Driver s Side Temperature Knob Turn clockwise or cou
254. he trailer tongue If using a weight distributing hitch make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution spring bars Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed 4 51 Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A Body to Ground Distance B Front of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so that the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle If a step bumper hitch is used the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper 4 52 If pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving Always use a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these limits Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn Never all
255. hearing the confirming horn chirp for the driver s side rear tire check to see if the TPMS warning light is still flashing If yes turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF to exit the sensor matching process If the TPMS warning light is not flashing the five minute time limit has passed and you will need to start the process over beginning with Step 1 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Put the valve caps back on the valve stems 5 67 Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle s tires including the spare tire if the vehicle has one for signs of wear or damage See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 69 for more information Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 69 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 74 5 68 When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear
256. hen the ignition key is in ON RUN If you cannot shift out of P Park ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P Park as you maintain brake application Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear See Shifting Out of Park on page 2 36 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 30 N Neutral In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only ACAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle D D
257. hen there is snow or ice between the tires and the road creating less traction or grip Wet ice can occur at about 32 F 0 C when freezing rain begins to fall resulting in even less traction Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand Drive with caution whatever the condition Accelerate gently so traction is not lost Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick so there is even less traction Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more The Antilock Brake System ABS on page 4 5 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice Turn off cruise control if equipped on slippery surfaces 4 28 Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby If possible use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
258. hen work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 5 35 Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak V GS After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir 5 36 A CAUTION With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system the brakes might not work well This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Notice Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish ca
259. here is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat Here is how to install the comfort guide to the shoulder belt 1 Slide the guide off of its storage clip located between the interior body and the seatback or from the storage pocket on the side of the seat 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 29 A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top 1 30 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide Slide the guide back onto its storage clip located between the interior body and the seatback or into the storage pocket on the side of the seat Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman
260. hicle to go faster do not hold the switch at resume accelerate Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed Press GG at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed e Move the cruise switch from to Hold it there until the vehicle reaches the desired speed and then release the switch To increase the vehicle speed in small amounts move the switch briefly to resume accelerate Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster 3 12 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Press at the end of the lever until the desired speed is reached then release it Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon the vehicle speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down When the brakes are applied the cruise control will
261. his mixture e Gives freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C outside temperature e Gives boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C engine temperature e Protects against rust and corrosion e Will not damage aluminum parts e Helps keep the proper engine temperature Notice If an improper coolant mixture is used the engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Notice If extra inhibitors and or additives are used in the vehicle s cooling system the vehicle could be damaged Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant recovery tank but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done The coolant level should be at least up to the FULL COLD mark If it is not there may be a leak in the cooling system
262. ht 4 50 Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 Ibs 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg at the rear axle It has a GVWR of 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg and a GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be GCWR Vehicle Weight Trailer Rating 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 386 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle is greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 Ibs 578 kg Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 lbs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 Ibs 1 803 kg This is very close to but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well 300 Ibs 136 kg could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs 181 kg to the rear axle weight The vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270kg 2 700 Ibs 1225kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 20
263. id making very sharp turns while trailering When turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps also flash telling other drivers the vehicle is turning changing lanes or stopping 4 54 When towing a trailer the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade If the transmission is not shifted down the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades the vehicle may sho
264. iensnachiteacettouss concave 3 29 Turn and Lane Change Signals 0 eeeeee 3 7 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever eeeeee 3 7 Uniform Tire Quality Grading cceeeeeeeeeee 5 72 Universal Home Remote System 2 2 46 Operation 2 0 0 0 c cee nina niaii 2 47 Vehicle COMTO iienaa nea aian E 4 3 Loading eiseni p Ea 4 31 Running While Parked osrrcnsinisncsirniniioies 2 38 SYMDOS oa near EEA iii Vehicle Customization DIC cccecec cece ees 3 56 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 4 7 16 Vehicle Identification Number VIN c ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee renen eee eenes 5 111 Service Parts Identification Label 5 111 Ventilation Adjustment ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 3 26 VISONS A AE 2 15 Voltmeter Gage sir rare eiii iiaa 3 34 13 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 27 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 6eeeeeees 3 51 Hazard Warning Flashers icce 3 6 Safety and Symbols cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee iii Washer Headlamps eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 10 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance ccecce 5 74 Different SiZ sisscccete Aine Avene iste 5 72 Replacement scscuscnccncreactedstate anaie 5 74 Where to Put the Restraint eeeeeeeee es 1 42 WWIMGOOWS SE REE Er Eee eee Eben 2 13 POE rr Ena eee ere 2 14 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Cleaning
265. ifferent rules for smaller children and infants If a child will be riding in the vehicle see Older Children on page 1 32 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 35 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know 4 Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Q What is wrong with this on A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulde
266. igned to protect the air suspension system and it is an indicator to the driver that the vehicle is overloaded When the overload protection mode is on it will not allow damage to the air compressor However do not overload the vehicle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 If the suspension remains at a low height the rear axle load has exceeded GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating When the overload protection mode is activated the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one minute without raising the vehicle depending on the amount of overload This will continue each time the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is reduced below GAWR Indicator Light The indicator light on the inflator switch in the rear passenger compartment also serves as an indicator for internal system error If the indicator light is flashing without the load leveling function or the inflator being active turn off the ignition The next day turn on the ignition and check the indicator light The vehicle can be driven with the light flashing but if it is the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible 4 45 Towing a Trailer A CAUTION The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all The driver and passengers could be seriously injured The vehicle may also be damag
267. ilable The vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or place Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone network congestion Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red the system may not be functioning properly Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated Press the OnStar button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active 2 46 Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held Radio Frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the
268. inal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Usea remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Your vehicle has a remote negative terminal marked GND for this purpose 5 41 G ml i DA 10 11 5 42 wy J DY ir Dy CZ w D J o DN Z D Dye I yy 4 2L L6 Engine 5 3L V8 Engine The remote negative terminal is located on the front engine lift bracket for the 4 2L L6 engine and on the accessory drive bracket for the 5 3L V8 engine Connect the other end of the
269. ine off the battery could be drained You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time D START This is the position that starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch returns to ON RUN for driving A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened the ignition is in ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF and the key is in the ignition 2 21 Retained Accessory Power RAP These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 20 minutes after the engine is turned off Audio System Power Windows e Overhead Console Sunroof if equipped These features will work when the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF these features continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened Starting the Engine Move the shift lever to P Park or N Neutral The engine will not start in any other position To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Notice Do not try to shift to P Park if the vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to P Park only when the vehicle is stopped 2 22 Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will slow down as the engine warms Do not race the engine immediately after starting it
270. information Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for Following break in engine speed and load can the first 500 miles 805 km be gradually increased Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle 2 20 Ignition Positions The ignition switch has four different positions Press the brake pedal and turn the ignition to ON RUN to shift out of P Park Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key Use the correct key make sure it is all the way in and turn it only with your hand If the key cannot be turned by hand see your dealer retailer A LOCK OFF This position locks the ignition and transmission The key can only be removed in LOCK OFF The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center If this happens move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC ACCESSORY If this doesn t work then the vehicle needs service B ACC ACCESSORY This is the position in which you can operate electrical accessories C ON RUN This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel warning and indicator lights The switch stays in this position when the engine is running If you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the eng
271. ing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin If the vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough the vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance is longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You might not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Antilock Brake System ABS helps
272. ing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible 5 108 Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fl
273. ing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD Check that the DVD player is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Turn the DVD power off then on then press the load eject button on the DVD player Do not attempt to forcibly remove the disc from the DVD player This could permanently damage the disc and DVD player 3 107 Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions headphone audio cuts out low batteries reception or buzzes range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are facing the front of the vehicle See your dealer retailer for assistance Check that the DVD player is in DVD mode lost the remote and or the headphones The DVD is playing but there is no picture or sound The DVD or CD could be dirty scratched or damaged The RSE is working correctly Use the wireless headphones or have the front seat passengers listen to another audio source The audio video skips or jumps The audio from the radio for the Radio with Six Disc CD and XM has taken over the audio from the DVD or CD when using the wired headphones 3 108 DVD Messages The following errors can display on the video screen Disc Format Error This message displays if a disc is in
274. into approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out e Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water A CAUTION Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water 4 25 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydropla
275. io SEEK or TYPE arrow to go to the previous or to the next station and stay there The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band K SCAN PI Press and hold either SCAN arrow or depending on the radio SCAN or TYPE arrow briefly until SCAN or SCN displays and a beep is heard The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either arrow again to stop scanning To scan preset stations press and hold either SCAN arrow or depending on the radio SCAN or TYPE arrow for more than four seconds PSCN or PSC displays and a double beep is heard The radio goes to a preset station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next preset station Press either arrow again to stop scanning presets The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM six XM1 and six XM2 can be programed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until a beep sounds When that numbered pushbutton is pressed the station that was set returns 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton To store an equalization setting to a preset station perform the following 1 Tune to the pre
276. ions delay system initialization the STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC If this is the case the vehicle does not need servicing For more information on the stability messages see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 When the StabiliTrak system is both on and actively controlling the stability of the vehicle the StabiliTrak light will blink for the duration of the event FAN ee The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal BS The StabiliTrak system is automatically disabled in 4LO mode and cannot be turned on until the vehicle is switched to 2HI 4HI or 4AWD The StabiliTrak system has three modes of operation STABILITRAK ON TRACTION CONTROL OFF and STABILITRAK OFF STABILITRAK ON The vehicle will default to STABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts the vehicle The StabiliTrak light will be off and no DIC messages will be displayed The StabiliTrak disable button is located on the transmission shift handle TRACTION CONTROL OFF The driver can modify the engine speed management system by momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak button on the transmission shift handle The StabiliTrak light will come on and TRACTION CONTROL OFF will be displayed For vehicles without a DIC the StabiliTrak indicator light will come on Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak button again will return the system to the STABILITRAK ON mode STAB
277. irectly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information 3 99 DVD Player The DVD player is located in the overhead console and is controlled by the buttons on the DVD player or on the remote control See Remote Control later in this section for more information The DVD player power can be turned on while the ignition is in ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code in the country that the vehicle was sold The DVD region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs Standard audio CDs CD R CD RW Video CD and Photo CD CD R media are fully supported by this DVD player DVD R and DVD RW media is supported if formatted as DVD Video DVD R and DVD RW media may or may not be supported by the DVD player 3 100 The DVD player does not support DVD RAM DVD ROM and DVD Audio media An error message displays if this type of media is inserted into the DVD player When using the wired headphones not included if the front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six Disc CD if equipped or use XM Satellite Radio Service if equipped the audio for these sources will be heard instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing through the RSE If an error message displays on the video screen see DVD Messages later in this
278. ires chains or other traction devices Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non public road or highway Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles Fuel delivery Reimbursement is approximately 5 Canadian Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service Lock Out Service Vehicle registration is required Trip Routing Service Limit of six requests per year Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Must be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify General Motors of Canada Limited requires pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair orders Once authorization has been received the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment Alternative Service If assistance cannot be provided right away the Roadside Assistance advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service You will receive payment up to 100 after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance Mechanical failures may be covered however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your d
279. is button might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 3 104 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter title and track number selection 10 Double Digit Entries Press to select chapter title and track numbers greater than 9 Press before inputting the number amp Clear Press within three seconds to clear a number that has been entered 3 Illumination Press to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight times out after about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when playing a DVD 4 Enter Press to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu amp gt Return Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active Main DVD Menu Press to access the DVD menu ee Camera Angle Press to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc Subtitle Press to turn on subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc b gt Fas
280. it 6 7 Disconnect the electrical connector from the old bulb Headlamps Plug the electrical connector into the new bulb using To replace one of these bulbs care not to touch the glass with your fingers 1 Open the hood Hood Release on page 5 11 8 Turn the socket clockwise to reinstall it 2 Lift the two headlamp retaining clips 9 Reinstall the headlamp cover 10 Push the headlamp assembly toward the vehicle 11 Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to secure the headlamp assembly 5 46 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps To replace one of these bulbs 1 Follow Steps 1 through 3 under Headlamps on page 5 46 to access the front turn signal sidemarker or parking lamp Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp assembly Holding the socket pull the old bulb to release it from the socket Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure Reinstall the headlamp assembly by lining up the headlamp assembly with the slots in the headlamp retaining clips Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to secure the headlamp assembly Taillamps Turn Signal and Stoplamps To replace a stoplamp taillamp or turn signal bulb 1 Open the liftgate See Liftgate Liftglass on page 2 12 2 Remove the two screws from the taillamp assembly 3 Pull the assembly away
281. ith the Tire Pressure Monitor System The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 63 for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running as a check to show it working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer lf the check engine light comes on and stays on while the engine is running this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well the vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Modi
282. its or signal lights Use good judgment about what is safe and what is not Driving on Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot do There are some hills that simply cannot be driven no matter how well built the vehicle A CAUTION Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you cannot control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill decide if it is too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you might not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs 4 17 Consider this as you approach a hill Driving Uphill Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel
283. ive vehicle 1 Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle and shift the transmission to P Park 2 Turn the engine off but leave the ignition in the ACC ACCESSORY position 3 Firmly set the parking brake 4 Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle Four wheel drive vehicles can be dinghy towed if the proper procedures are followed The transmission has no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed so it is important that all the steps listed in this manual are followed to dinghy tow a four wheel drive vehicle 4 40 ACAUTION Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park The driver or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N Neutral 5 Shift the transfer case to Neutral See Shifting into Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 6 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle 7 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF and remove the key the steering wheel will still turn After towing see Shifting Out of Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 Dolly Towing Front Towing Front Wheels Off the Ground Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice If a two wheel drive vehicle is towed with the rear wheels on the groun
284. k heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to There is also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving under Off Road Driving on page 4 13 4 37 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended for a snow plow Notice Adding a snow plow or similar equipment to your vehicle can damage it and the repairs would not be covered by warranty Do not install a snow plow or similar equipment on your vehicle Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground Consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following 4 38 Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing Dinghy towing is
285. ke stop the disc brakes adjust for wear 5 37 Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking The vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When parts of the braking system are replaced for example when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed be sure to get new approved replacement parts If this is not done the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed Battery This vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery see your dealer retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for battery location Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 5 38 Vehicle Storage ACAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 39 for tips on worki
286. keep the vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving on page 4 13 e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 7 for further information A CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment have your dealer retailer do these jobs When you go to your dealer retailer for service trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts To purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Owner Checks and Services on page
287. kout Protection 2 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 11 Locks Delayed Locking cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 DOOF arrean a e e E 2 7 Lockout Protection sesinin iess nanie edenis 2 11 Power DOOR roereier en E a a E S EN 2 8 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 9 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeeee eee 2 11 Loss Of Control krasne aoir nsa 4 12 Low Fuel Warning Light asaan 3 47 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 43 Luggage Carrier cccceeeceeeeee tessa eeaeeeeeneees 2 52 Lumbar Manual ControlSet onnisti 1 3 Power Controls cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services ceeeeeeeee es 6 6 At Each Fuel Fill ccccccccceeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 6 9 At Least Once a Month ccccccc ec ec ee ee ees 6 9 At Least Once a Year cccccceceeceeee ee eeeeeees 6 10 Introduction sn 6 2 Maintenance Footnotes cccecececeeeeee ences 6 7 Maintenance Record ccceeeee eee eeeeeeeeee 6 16 Maintenance Replacement Parts 5 6 14 Maintenance Requirements i c 6 2 Owner Checks and Services cceceeeeeeeees 6 8 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance cccececeeeeeeeeee 6 4 USING Fe ele br E aioe sn ed 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Malfunction Indicator Lamp n s
288. l System 3 22 Outlet Adjustment cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eee es 3 26 Rear Climate Control System eeeeeeees 3 26 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 27 Instrument Panel Cluster ceeeeeeeeeee ees 3 28 Speedometer and Odometer 0 0eeeee 3 29 Trip Odometer ccececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 29 TAGHOMGIGN roria omae hen i ES 3 29 Safety Belt Reminders ceeeeeeeeeee eens 3 30 Airbag Readiness Light eeeeeeeeeeee eee es 3 31 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 32 Charging System Light ceeeeeeeeeee eee 3 33 Voltmeter Gage ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 34 3 1 Section 3 Instrument Panel Brake System Warning Light eeeeees 3 35 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light 3 36 StabiliTrak Service Light ccccccceeeeeee 3 36 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 0 cccccceeeee 3 37 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 0 3 37 Tire Pressure LIG RE si ass ere dens 3 38 Malfunction Indicator Lamp sssseeeeeereree 3 38 Oil Pressure Gage W G sssseeeeeeeee een r nr renene 3 42 Change Engine Oil Light W u u s ssseeeererereree 3 43 Security Light ordren sager tanata 3 43 Cruise Control Light W ssseseeverere renerne 3 43 Reduced Engine Power Light 0 3 44 Highbeam On Light
289. l allow you to load things on top of your vehicle The luggage carrier has side rails attached to the roof places to use for tying things down and may have sliding crossrails These let you load some other things on top of your vehicle as long as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier To slide the crossrails to where you want them pull up on the lever on each side of the crossrail This releases the crossrail and allows you to slide it When the crossrail is where you want it press down on the levers to lock it into place Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 220 Ibs 100 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier is locked and cargo is still securely fastened When the luggage carrier is not in use place the crossrails at the following positions for wind noise reduction Place one crossrail at the rear most point of the vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening of the rear door Rear Floor Storage Cover ACAUTION If any removable convenience ite
290. l and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running or if the key is in ON RUN and the light is not on The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection 3 41 Oil Pressure Gage Canada United States The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals 3 42 A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as
291. lar wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy 5 60 If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label shows your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare tire if the vehicle has one See Spare Tire on page 5 102 for additional information How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at lea
292. lated wheels The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty 5 109 Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and e
293. layed turn off the engine until it cools down Engine Fan Noise The vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the clutch is not engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases when the clutch engages so you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when the engine is started The sound will go away as the fan clutch disengages Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location AR When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check the power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean
294. ld be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert If the vehicle stalls or is about to stall and you cannot make it up the hill Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards and apply the parking brake If the engine is still running shift the transmission to R Reverse release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in R Reverse If the engine has stopped running you need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to P Park and restart the engine Then shift to R Reverse release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in R Reverse While backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position so you can tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as you back down It is best to back down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Things not to do if the vehicle stalls or is about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into N Neutral to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work The vehicle can roll backward very quickly and could go out o
295. lder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3 disc using multiple sessions It is usually better to burn the disc all at once 3 80 The player is able to read and play a maximum of 253 folders 50 playlists 20 sessions and 949 files Long file names folder names or playlist names may use more disc memory space than necessary To conserve space on the disc minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names An MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders can also be played The system can support up to 11 folders in depth though keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback If a CD contains more than the maximum of 253 folders 50 playlists 20 sessions and 949 files the player allows access and navigates up to the maximum but all items over the maximum will not play Root Directory The root directory is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory displays as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder lf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no com
296. le To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn the interior lamps off and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7 16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7 17 Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean
297. le in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 2 37 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The CAUTION Continued 2 38 CAUTION Continued vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park A CAUTION If the vehicle has four wheel drive it will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park if the transfer case is in N Neutral So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park on page 2 34 If pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 46 Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Adjust the mirror to see clearly behind your vehicle Hold the mirror in th
298. le items are put in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the ashtray pull the covered bin out of the cupholder To use the lighter press it in all the way and let go When it is ready it will pop back out by itself Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Climate Controls Dual Climate Control System With this system the heating cooling and ventilation can be controlled for the vehicle D Recirculation E Air Conditioning F Rear Window Defogger Fan Control Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls C Air Delivery Mode Control D gt 3 19 Driver s Side Temperature Lever Raise or lower the lever to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver s side of the vehicle Passenger Side Temperature Lever Raise or lower the lever to increase or decrease the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle This right lever also adjusts the temperature to the rear seat outlets When the temperature outside is 0 F 18 C or lower use the e
299. le of outputting audio to the vehicle speakers by using the radio The RSE system can be selected as an audio source on the radio if the RSE system power is on Once the RSE system is selected as an audio source on the radio adjust the speaker volume on the radio if necessary If the RSE system power is not on the RSE system is not an available source on the radio See the vehicle s radio information The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system if equipped The RSE system can be selected as an audio source on the rear seat audio system if the RSE system power is on See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 109 for more information Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console To use the video screen 1 Push forward on the release button located on the DVD display console 2 Pull the screen down away from you and adjust its position as desired When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the screen shuts off but the DVD continues to play through the previous audio or video source The video screen contains the IR transmitters for the wireless headphones and the IR receivers for the remote control If the screen is in the closed position the signals are not available for the operation of the headphones or the remote control Notice Avoid d
300. ler or a professional towing service Parking Over Things That Burn A CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust ACAUTION Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death Exhaust may enter the vehicle if The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation parking garages tunnels deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued The vehicle s exhaust system has been modified damaged or improperly repaired There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completely sealed If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle Drive it only with the windows completely down Have the vehicle repaired immediately Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation 2 37 Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know ACAUTION Idling a vehic
301. lerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if the vehicle does get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause it to slide out of control A CAUTION Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only 4 23 Driving in Water A CAUTION Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before driving through it Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe you probably will not get through Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts 4 24 If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on th
302. liTrak light will come on and SERVICE STABILITRAK will be displayed on the DIC For vehicles without a DIC the StabiliTrak light and the StabiliTrak service light will both come on If the SERVICE STABILITRAK message or StabiliTrak service light does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle see your dealer retailer for service Adding non GM accessories can affect the vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for more information Locking Rear Axle Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when traction is low this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle Steering Power Steering If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and vehicle speed While in a curve speed is the one factor that can be controlled If there is a need to reduce speed do it before entering the curve while the front wheels are straight Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until out of the curve and then accelera
303. light comes on the liftgate or liftglass is not completely shut Close the liftgate or liftglass Never drive with the liftgate or liftglass even partially open 3 45 Fuel Gage Here are four things that some owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up The gage doesn t go back to empty when you turn off the ignition United States Canada When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have remaining An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on 3 46 Low Fuel Warning Light The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when you are starting the engine This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn it off add fuel to the fuel tank See Fuel on page 5 5 Check Gas Cap Light If your vehicle has this light it will come on if your gas cap is not securely fastened See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 38 for more information Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle may have this feature The Driver Information Center DIC
304. livery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed k If driving regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change I Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety dependability and emission control performance Your dealer retailer can assist with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Notice It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle warr
305. ll be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Towing a Trailer on page 4 46 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips 4 33 A 4 34 Example 1 Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 2 Available Occupant and Cargo Weight 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg 700 Ibs 317 kg Example 2 Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 5 Available Cargo 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 750 Ibs 136 kg 250 Ibs 113 kg Refer to your vehicle s Tire and Loading
306. lly be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 dr bbb org goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program STEP THREE Canadian Owners In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge Mediation Arbitration Program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70
307. loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or LOW BATTERY If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 3 17 Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome courtesy and vanity lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off This helps to keep the battery from running down If the battery run down protection shuts off the interior lamps it may be necessary to do one of the following to return to normal operation Shut off all lamps and close all doors Turn the ignition key to ON RUN This feature also turns off the parking lamps and headlamps under most circumstances if they are left on Turn the exterior lamps knob to turn them back on Accessory Power Outlet s Accessory power outlets l
308. lowed by Please say yes or no If the number is correct say Yes If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered After the system stores the phone number it responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK If the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 If the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu Using the Digit Store Command The digit store command allows a phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Digit Store The system responds with Please say the first digit to store followed by a tone 3 Say the first digit to be stored The system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be stored is complete If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them 3 89 4 After the complete number has been entered say Store
309. lug wires An Emission Control Service Additional Required Services cont d FEED 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80000 120 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote Maintenance Footnotes a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts or signs of wear Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc 150 000 c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Inspect wiper blades for wear cracking or contamination Clean the windshield and wiper blades if contaminated Replace wiper blades that a
310. ly reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Although the radio has a built in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference some static can occur especially around tall buildings or hills causing the sound to fade in and out 3 111 XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged as long as it is securely attached to the base If the mast becomes slightly bent straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent replace it Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is tightened to its base If tightening is required tighten by hand until fully seated
311. m is not secured properly it can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to secure any such item properly The vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable storage cover To remove the rear floor storage cover do the following 1 Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle 2 Raise the cover slightly to unhook it 3 Pull the cover towards the rear of the vehicle to release it from the forward mounting slots To reinstall the rear floor storage cover reverse the previous steps Make sure the cover is secure by applying slight pressure to the latch until it clicks 2 53 Convenience Net To remove the cargo cover do the following 1 Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully For vehicles with a convenience net located in the rear roll it back up use it to store small loads as far forward as possible The net should not be used to store heavy loads 2 Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the pocket in the trim panel Cargo Cover 3 Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so that you can remove the shade from the vehicle If your vehicle has a cargo cover you can use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle To install the cargo cover AN CAUTION 1 Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel located behind the rear seat An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown 2 Squeeze the opposite endcap align i
312. m side to side in this position Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull out Extension Your vehicle may have this feature Pull the sun visor down to block glare Pull the sun visor extender out for additional coverage Detach the sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side to cover the side window Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror You may have to lift a cover to expose the mirror Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Your vehicle may have this feature Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps The lamps will turn off when the cover is closed 2 15 Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities This vehicle has theft deterrent features however they do not make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle may have a content theft deterrent alarm system The security light is located on the instrument panel cluster To operate the system 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The security light should flash The system will not activate if the doors are locked with the key or manual door lock 3 Close all doors The security light should turn off after about 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the security light turns off lf a locked door is opened without the key or the RKE transmitter the alarm will g
313. manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 33 4 Put the transmission in P Park 5 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions 6 Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position 7 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF 4 43 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four wheel drive vehicle from the rear 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions A CAUTION Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly if the transmission is in P Park The driver or 3 Firmly set the parking brake See Parking Brake on others could be injured Make sure the parking page 2 33 brake is firmly set before the transfer case is 4 Put the transmission in P Park shifted to N Neutral 5 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the at manufacturer s instructions 7 Shift the transfer case to Neutral See Shifting into Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 6 Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position 8 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF After towing
314. mended inflation pressure so you can finish your trip Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle This way a spare tire will be available in case you need it again Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes because they will not fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible The vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle s interior When cleaning the vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to t
315. mental restraints to the safety belts Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 1 56 A CAUTION Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with roof rail airbags There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol ACAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s The system checks the airbag electrical system for safety belt system nor its airbag system is malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical designed for them Young children and infants problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 need the protection that a child
316. more information TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message displays when you momentarily press the StabiliTrak button located on the transmission shift handle In this mode stability control and the brake traction control are functional Engine speed management will be modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely For more details on this mode see StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position 3 56 DIC Vehicle Customization Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program some features to one setting based on your preference All of the customizable options listed may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available display on the Driver Information Center DIC The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then To change feature preferences make sure the ignition is on and the vehicle is in P Park To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off Press 1 to scroll through the available customizable options After pressing i VEHICLE SETTINGS momentarily displays before going to a customization option Lock Doors Press 1 until LOCK DOORS IN GEAR appears in the di
317. mote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 6 Storage Areas Glove Box Lift the glove box handle up to open it Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box Overhead Console Your vehicle may have this feature The overhead console may include reading lamps a Universal Home Remote and a sunroof switch See Sunroof on page 2 55 and Universal Home Remote System on page 2 46 for more information 2 51 Center Console Storage Pull the front lever on the center console while lifting the top to open it The console has cupholders on the front and rear of the storage compartment The console may also contain Rear Seat Audio Controls Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets Rear Climate Control To open the center armrest compartment lift the cover by pulling up on the latch handle located under the front edge of the armrest 2 52 Luggage Carrier A CAUTION If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier like paneling plywood or a mattress the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven This can cause a driver to lose control The item being carried could be violently torn off and this could cause a collision and damage the vehicle Items may be carried inside Never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of the vehicle If your vehicle has a luggage carrier it wil
318. mpact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact In a rollover event roof rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows that have occupant seating positions 1 61 How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually Roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body Rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants
319. n Lock Out Service Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar For security reasons the driver must present identification before this service is given Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway Tow to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty service or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand mud or snow Flat Tire Change Service is provided to change a flat tire with the spare tire The spare tire if equipped must be in good condition and properly inflated It is the owner s responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty Battery Jump Start Service is provided to jump start a dead battery Trip Routing Service Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route Additional travel information is also available Allow three weeks for delivery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km Powertrain warranty period Items considered are hotel meals and rental car Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance Impound towing caused by violation of any laws Legal fines Mounting dismounting or changing of snow t
320. n Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the audio The video screen displays Parental Control ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player flashes It also disables all other button operations from the remote control and the DVD player with the exception of the eject button Press this button again to restore operation of the DVD player This button can also be used to turn the DVD player power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is in RUN ACCESSORY or if Retained Accessory Power RAP is active Headphones The RSE system includes two sets of wireless headphones Each set of headphones has an ON OFF control An indicator light illuminates on the headphones when they are on If the light does not illuminate the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement following for more information Each set of headphones has a volume knob To adjust the volume adjust this knob The transmitters are located below the video display screen The headphones shut off automatically if they lose the signal from the system after about four minutes to save battery power The signal can be lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters When using the wired headphones if the front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six Disc CD or use XM Satellite Radio Service audio is heard from these sources instead of the DVD o
321. n The power indicator light flashes The system might be off The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light flashes The system might be in auxiliary mode The disc is upside down or is not compatible Check the display mode settings in the display menu The disc was ejected but it was pulled back into the DVD player In auxiliary mode the picture moves or scrolls The language in the audio or on the screen is wrong The remote control does not work The disc is being stored in the DVD player Press the eject button again to eject the disc Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Change the Video Format to PAL or NTSC See Stereo RCA Jacks previously for how to change the video format Check the audio or language selection in the main DVD menu Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light flashes After stopping the player push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound My disc is stuck in the player The Load Eject button does not work If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player resumes play
322. n be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 107 Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving except when applying the brake pedal firmly ACAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When the brake wear warning sound is heard have the vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 5 120 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every bra
323. n finished loading CDs press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function The radio begins to play the last CD loaded If more than one CD has been loaded a number for each CD displays 3 74 Playing a Specific Loaded CD For every CD loaded a number displays To play a specific CD first press the CD AUX button if not already in CD mode then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD A small bar displays under the CD number that is playing and the track number displays A Eject Base or MP3 Radio Press to eject a CD Eject can be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs can be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first cD A Eject Press to eject CD s To eject the CD that is currently playing press and release this button To eject multiple CDs 1 Press and hold the ZA button for two seconds A beep is heard and the indicator light located to the right of the slot begins to flash and EJECT ALL displays 2 Once the light stops flashing REMOVE CD displays The CD ejects and can be removed Once the CD is removed the indicator light begins flashing again and another CD ejects To stop ejecting the CDs press the A button lf the CD is not removed after 25 seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player If CD is pushed back into the player before the 25 second time period is complete the player senses an error and tries to eject the
324. n lock or unlock the door from the inside by sliding Young children who get into unlocked vehicles the manual lever forward or rearward When the door is may be unable to get out A child can be unlocked you can see a red area on the lever overcome by extreme heat and can suffer The manual lever on each door works only that permanent injuries or even death from heat door s lock stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the driver s and front Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors To unlock the doors press the other side of the switch passenger s door armrests Delayed Locking This feature delays the locking of the doors and the liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless entry system The first press of the power door lock switch or lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the driver s door open will activate the delay locking A chime will sound All doors and the liftgate can be reopened for up to five seconds from the time the last door is closed Five seconds after the last door is closed all the doors will lock You can lock the doors immediately by using the power door lock switch or by pressing the lock button on the optional remote keyless ent
325. n pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upo
326. n stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 1 Lift the seatback until it locks into the upright position Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 2 Return the head restraints to the upright position by reaching behind the seat and pulling it forward until it locks into place Push and pull on the head restraint to make sure that it is locked 3 Flip the seat cushion back into place Safety Belts ACAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly It also describes some things not to do with safety belts ACAUTION seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a i safety belt properly Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly In a crash if you or your passenger s are not wearing safety belts the This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the injuries can be much worse You can hit things safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 30 inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the for additional inf
327. n subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 64 for additional information 5 63 Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by oth
328. n the display To select your preference for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter press lt while LOCK FEEDBACK BOTH is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings LOCK FEEDBACK BOTH default The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the lock button LOCK FEEDBACK OFF There will be no feedback when locking the vehicle LOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the RKE transmitter LOCK FEEDBACK HORN The horn will chirp the second time you press the button with the lock symbol on the RKE transmitter To select a setting and move on to the next feature press i while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 58 Unlock Feedback Press 1 until UNLOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS appears in the display To select your preference for the feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter press lt a while UNLOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS is displayed on the DIC Pressing will scroll through the following settings UNLOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS default The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter UNLOCK FEEDBACK HORN The horn will chirp the second time you
329. n the buckle so that the retractor to set the lock the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 50 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 If the child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 43 for more information 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly secured in the center rear seat although some of them will fit there If the center seat position is too narrow for your child restraint secure it in a rear outside seat position If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1 49 1 51 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Po
330. nce Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from the vehicle To help protect the environment and to keep the vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain the vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help keep this vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You might drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You might use the vehicle in making deliveries Or you might drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You might need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to
331. nd Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire if the vehicle has one The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS 5 66 sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer retailer for service Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than tho
332. ndy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers retailers My Driveway Access quick links to parts and service estimates check trade in values or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile My Preferences Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up visit the My GM Canada section within www gm ca Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use the Text Telephones TTYs GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices GMC encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail GMC the letter should be addressed to United States GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 www GMC com 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 From Puerto Rico 1
333. ne Bluetooth oc cs ru sie mniec nini aa 3 86 Power Door LOCKS sr a ae i eas 2 8 Electrical System 5 112 Lumbar Controls sireni rero 1 4 Reduced Engine Light 1 W W sssssesereeeerrern eres 3 44 Retained Accessory u ssssssesesereseekesr er nennnnee 2 22 Te E gavy seks ieerear E E eee are 1 3 Steering Fluid 0 eee cece eee eee eee ereere 5 33 WINGOWS siisi aeneae DA EE 2 14 PRIVACY 2 ar serene lan runer EEN diode 7 16 Event Data Recorders ssssssssesrseseersnrses 7 17 Navigation System cccseeeseneeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 18 ON Stale Seaan Grasses a EE aE 7 18 Radio Frequency Identification 7 18 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 9 R Radio Frequency Identification RFID PPNIVACY renses er fe hee narre A 7 18 Radio Sy 5 ore sa sr erk bend ses the 3 64 Radios Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual W W u ssssseeeeereeeree 3 86 Rear Seat Audio a se eneee 3 109 10 Radios cont REGODUON so soner o i 3 111 Setting the Clock ssivc sisiessdnwi Ai imene 3 63 Theft Deterrent 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 110 Reading Lamps si ic ccie intviestoeetalaniace oateanetscens 3 17 Rear AXE scrsacsiivecs vn oetie ie ecces iteeeeiden 5 43 LOCKIER 4 10 Rear Climate Control System ssseeeeree 3 26 Rear Door Security Locks W u sssseeeeererereneree 2 11 Rear Floor Storage Cover W W u sssseeererererr
334. ng carne icaid aen i 3 16 Event Data Recorders u ssssesseeeeeree senere nnen 7 17 Exit LIMIN ceansa en kaeatentiesnenaie ahs 3 17 Extender Safety Belt ccecceceeeeeeeeeeeees 1 32 Filter Engine Air Cleaner ccceeceeeeeeeneeeeeneee ees 5 20 Fi ish Damage career dace ae Sten Ueno 5 110 Fixed Mast Antenna vissite daunin 3 112 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 sceeeeeeeeeeees 3 6 FlaSh tO PaSS ircen andeseideticsnterecencansntaiienes en 3 8 Plat IN ge ccd ae a a a a a 5 76 Flat Tire Changing cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 88 Flat Tire Storing arrestere cesses 5 100 Fluid Automatic Transmission ceee 5 21 Power Steering cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee iaDia 5 33 Windshield Washer 2 eseeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 5 34 Fog Lamp OG enparar E E E 3 15 Four Wheel Drive cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 28 5 44 FrONTAX E EET ER ere 5 44 Fuel eeaeee e ERNE BRET Een 5 5 Additives sereis oe irna aTa e 5 6 California Fuel 21222222 bb airnn ninis 5 6 Check Gas Cap Light 3 47 Driving for Better Economy 4 2 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 00 5 10 Filling the Tank 2 2 arr eea aes 5 8 Fuels in Foreign Countries cceeeeeeeeeeees 5 7 Fuel cont Gago meae E E EEE E 3 46 Gasoline Octane 6 uran cni isee ees 5 5 Gasoline Specifications u sssseeeeerererreree 5 6 Low Warning Light 22533 ns ere baade hb anse 3 47 Fuses Engine Compartment
335. ng around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage If the vehicle is driven infrequently remove the black negative cable from the battery This helps keep the battery from running down Extended Storage For extended storage of the vehicle remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger This helps maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time Jump Starting lfthe vehicle s battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely ACAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty Your vehicle cannot be started by pushing or pulling it and can be damage by trying it 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the j
336. ng wheel on the instrument panel To turn the rear wiper on turn the control to either 1 2 or 3 For delayed wiping turn the control to 1 or 2 For steady wiping turn the control to 3 To turn the wiper off turn the control to 0 To wash the rear window press ra located in the center of the control The rear window washer uses the fluid from the same reservoir as the windshield washer However the rear window washer runs out of fluid before the windshield washer If the windshield can be washed but not the rear window check the fluid level Headlamp Washer For vehicles with a headlamp washer system the headlamp washer button is located on the instrument panel Press the button briefly and then release to wash the headlamps This system is separate from the other washer systems Cruise Control With cruise control a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h If you apply the brakes the cruise control shuts off A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads
337. ngine coolant heater if the vehicle has one to provide warmer air faster to the vehicle 8 Fan Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed If the knob is in off mode outside air still enters the vehicle and is directed based on the position of the air delivery mode knob The temperature can still be adjusted using the temperature knob Air Delivery Mode Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the airflow direction inside the vehicle 3 20 To change the current mode select one of the following pe Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets Wi Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air is directed toward the windshield and the side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper vents and warmer air to the floor outlets ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and the side window outlets The recirculation button cannot be selected while in floor mode N Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the floor windshield and side window outlets The recirculation button cannot be selected while in defog mode HY Defrost This mode clears the windows of fog or frost more quickly Air is directed to the windshield and the side window outlets with some air directed to the floor outlets The air conditioning compressor ma
338. ning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include Allow extra following distance Pass with caution Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 53 Turn off cruise control 4 26 Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consider having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include e Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside e Wiper Blades In good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked Lamps Do they all work and are lenses clean Tires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure e Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest Other driving tips include Keep the vehicle well ventilated e Keep interior temperature cool e Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often Hill and Mountain Roads
339. nt in a rear seat If you must secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Q A 1 38 What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs A CAUTION To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash infants need complete support This is because an infant s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant ina rear facing child restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of
340. nterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver side of the vehicle The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the driver This knob can also adjust the passenger side temperature setting if the two are linked Passenger Side Temperature Knob Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the passenger The passenger temperature setting can be set to match and link to the driver s temperature setting by pressing and holding the AUTO button for three seconds When adjusting the driver side temperature setting the passenger side temperature setting will follow and both arrows will appear on the display The passenger side temperature setting also resets and re links to the driver side temperature setting if the vehicle has been off for more than three hours A amp V Fan Control Press the arrows to increase or decrease the fan speed The display shows the selected fan speed and the driver side temperature setting for five seconds i Air Delivery Mode Control Press to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle The air delivery modes will appear on the display as it is being adjusted The display shows the selected air delivery mode and the driver temperature setting for five secon
341. nuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer retailer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue S E Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government lf you live in Canada and you believe that y
342. o System W sssseeeeeeeerer eee r ennen rene 3 62 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 1 1 1 1 3 110 Chime Level Adjustment eeeeeeeeee es 3 112 Fixed Mast Antenna eeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee 3 112 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual ecce 3 86 Radio Reception 2 cccciee cc cee cect eeteaveeee scence 3 111 Rear Seat Audio RSA n 3 109 Audio System cont Setting the Clock 1 W W ssssseseeeeereere erne erne 3 63 Theft Deterrent Feature X sssesesseeerseer 3 110 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 112 Audio System S dicccsc eiecereedier cae ecengetanenennereecies 3 64 Automatic Headlamp System eeeeeeeeees 3 14 Automatic Transmission PIUIG ESRB SEES ESS e SEE SEERE SES SEE ESS SEE eta 5 21 Operatii si onses ie denen ede te cata SEE ESE Minas 2 25 Battery at arne dei eh ae brande 5 38 Electric Power Management sacc 3 17 Run Down Protection csceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 18 Bluetooth sis ineens iness ienien 3 86 Brake Emergencies orisii ereenn ERAN 4 6 Brake FIUO 5 3 ronnie adelen T 5 35 Brakes 0 vette sdiscccstcemntebshiveatel le sr Ro aes 5 35 System Warning Light a an 3 35 Braking sarearen eea eidar neces aeaedeaetne 4 4 Braking in Emergencies sirrinsirsorusirsaseriorian 4 6 Break In New Vehicle cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 20 Bulb Replacement eceeeceeeneceeeeeeeeee
343. o off The headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes and the horn will sound for 30 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power To avoid setting off the alarm by accident Always lock the vehicle using the door key after the doors are closed Always unlock a door with a key or use the RKE transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm To turn off the alarm press unlock on the RKE transmitter or unlock any door with the key Testing the Alarm To test the alarm 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the RKE transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch will not work If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 113 If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer retailer Passlock U S Only Your vehicle has the Passlock theft deterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent
344. oading can shorten the life of the vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label M AT ON REAR The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed EPE kg or A Ibs SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker 4 32 The Tire and Loading Information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 53 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that wi
345. off If a problem is detected a warning message will appear on the display Pressing the trip stem will acknowledge any warning or service messages Pressing any of the DIC steering wheel buttons trip information fuel information customization or select button will also acknowledge any warnings or service messages You should take any message that appears on the display seriously and remember that clearing the message will only make the message disappear not correct the problem The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering wheel These buttons are trip information fuel information customization and select The button functions are detailed in the following pages Trip Information Button ZX Trip Information Press the trip information button to scroll through the ODOMETER TRIP A TRIP B TIRE PRESSURES and TIMER Odometer Press the trip information button until ODOMETER appears on the display This mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers Pressing the reset stem located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will also display the odometer Trip A Press the trip information button until TRIP A appears on the display This mode shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either miles or kilometers Trip B Press the trip information button until TRIP B appears on th
346. ogrammable Unlocking Feature The following is the list of available programming options Mode 1 Driver s door unlocks when the transmission is shifted into P Park Mode 2 All doors unlock when the transmission is shifted into P Park Mode 3 All doors unlock when the key is removed from the ignition Mode 4 No automatic door unlock The automatic door locks were pre programmed at the factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is shifted to P Park The following instructions detail how to program your door locks differently than the factory setting Choose one of the four programming options listed previously before entering the program mode To enter the program mode you need to do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 Turn the key to ON RUN and LOCK OFF twice Then with the key in LOCK OFF release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second program timer will begin 3 You are now ready to program the automatic door locks Select one of the four programming options listed above and press the unlock side of the power door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking options You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock an
347. old and damp the system may cause the windows to fog while using recirculation mode If the windows do start to fog select defog or defrost mode and increase fan speed Recirculation mode if selected will be cleared when the engine is turned off Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window QY Rear Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on The rear window defogger will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed If additional warming time is needed press the button again The heated mirrors will also come on when the rear window defogger is turned on See Outside Heated Mirrors on page 2 42 Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty 3 25 Outlet Adjustment Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side of the instrument panel to direct the airflow Use the thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close off the airflow Operation Tips Clear away any ice snow or leaves from air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the
348. on how to reset the message This message clears itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle CHECK TIRE PRESSURE On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires needs to be checked If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 5 53 Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 If the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 38 3 52 CHECK WASHER FLUID This message displays if the washer fluid level is low Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir clears this message See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 34 This message clears itself after 10 seconds or you can manually clear it from the DIC display DRIVER DOOR AJAR This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver door is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ENGINE COOLANT HOT ENGINE OVERHEATED Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overh
349. ormation vehicle You and your passenger s can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q Will be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if am wearing a safety belt A You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being
350. ort all functions and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in vehicle Bluetooth system See gm com bluetooth for more information on compatible phones Voice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags Noise Keep interior noise levels to a minimum The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise When to Speak A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command Wait until the tone and then speak How to Speak Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice 3 86 Audio System When using the in vehicle Bluetooth system sound comes through the vehicle s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system Use the audio system volume knob during a call to change the volume level The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls To prevent missed calls a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low Bluetooth Controls Use the button located on the steering wheel to operate the in vehicle Bluetooth system See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 110 for more information we Push To Talk Press to answer incoming calls to confirm system information and to start speech recognition Pairing A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to the vehi
351. ortion of the system has been manually turned off or a problem is detected in the system If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center a message will appear also see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Gage United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area it means that the engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 30 for more information 3 37 Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure light this light comes on briefly when the engine is started and e provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC can accompany the light See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 for more information Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so If a tire is underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 5 53 for more information 3 38 When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there could be a problem w
352. ou may need to add some lubricant When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 0 50 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use To determine what kind of lubricant to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Headlamp Aiming Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment However if your vehicle is damaged in a crash the headlamp aim may be affected Aim adjustment to the low beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their high beam headlamps at you for vertical aim If the headlamps need to be re aimed it is recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service 5 45 Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 5 49 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer retailer Halogen Bulbs A CAUTION Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or 3 others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle to access the electrical connectors 4 Remove the cover from the headlamp bulb 5 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
353. ount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly In order to calibrate CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows If CAL is not displayed press and hold D or depending on the mirror press COMP until CAL displays The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction Compass Variance The mirror is set to zone eight If you do not live in zone eight or drive out of the area the compass variance needs to be changed to the appropriate zone To adjust for compass variance 3 Keep pressing O until the desired zone number 1 Find your current location and variance zone displays Release the button After several seconds number on the following zone map of inactivity the new zone number locks in and the compass display returns 4 Calibrate the compass as previously described Outside Manual Mirrors Adjust the outside rearview mirrors to see a little of the side of your vehicle and the area beside your vehicle Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return to its original position 2 Press and hold D or depending on the mirror press COMP until a Z and or a zone number displays The compass is now in zone mode
354. our vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify General Motors Call 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 or write GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 In Canada call 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and
355. overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of the vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can Engine Compartment Fuse Block GRUS OH Je EG AG z ES g Y The fuse block is located under the hood in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location Remove the primary cover by pressing the two locking tabs Remove the secondary cover by snapping off while lifting To reinstall the fuse panel cover reverse th
356. ow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1 500 Ibs 680 kg needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed adjusted and maintained properly Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak the trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system Driving with a Trailer ACAUTION When towing a trailer exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window is open Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death To maximize safety when towing a trailer Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip Never drive with the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window open Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 37 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the ad
357. owledge messages on the DIC display and set your customization settings For example this button will allow you to reset the trip odometers turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message and enables you to scroll through and select the language in which the DIC information will appear DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action Press any of the DIC buttons on the steering wheel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be removed from the DIC display Take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them 3 51 CHANGE ENGINE OIL This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed and service is required for your vehicle See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Engine Oil on page 5 15 for more information Also see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 for information
358. p 1 Open the liftgate See Liftgate Liftglass on page 2 12 for more information 2 Attach the wheel wrench A to the extension C 3 Insert the socket end of the extension C on a 45 degree angle downward into the hoist drive shaft hole It is exposed when the rear gate is open and is just above the rear bumper Be sure the socket end of the extension C connects to the hoist shaft 4 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower See Secondary Latch System on page 5 97 for more information 5 91 Notice If you drive away before the spare tire or secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled you could damage your vehicle Always reinstall this cable before driving your vehicle 7 Put the spare tire near the flat tire Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 Do a safety check before proceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 88 for more information 2 Use the flat end of the wheel wrench to carefully pry off the center cap 5 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when the tire has been completely lowered and pull it through the wheel opening 6 Pull the tire out from under the vehicle 5 92 3 Using the wheel wrench loosen all the wheel nu
359. page 3 6 Tie ared cloth to an outside mirror A CAUTION Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle This may cause exhaust gases to get inside Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle is stuck in the snow Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Open a window about two inches 5 cm on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 37 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm but be careful To save fuel run the engine for only short periods as needed to
360. passenger s windows Press down the top of the switch to lower the window and pull up on the switch to raise the window If you hold the switch down for three to seven seconds after the window has been completely lowered or raised the window will not operate for about 15 seconds Express Down Window AUTO Express down The driver s and front passenger s window switches have an express down feature that allows you to lower the window without holding the switch down Press down briefly on the driver s or front passenger s window switch labeled AUTO to activate the express down feature Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly The express down feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top of the switch Window Lockout fas Lockout Your vehicle has a lockout feature to prevent passengers from operating the power windows The lockout switch is located in front of the window switches on the driver s door A light in the lockout switch will come on to show that the switch has been activated Press the lockout switch again to return to normal operation Sun Visors Sun Visors with Slide Rod Your vehicle may have this feature Pull the sun visor down to block glare Detach the sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side to side to cover the driver or passenger side of the front window Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window It can also be moved along the rod fro
361. played on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings SEAT RECALL OFF default The driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will only be recalled when the memory button 1 or 2 is pressed SEAT RECALL AT KEY IN The drivers memory seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will be recalled when you put the key in the ignition SEAT RECALL ON REMOTE The driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will be recalled when you unlock the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Whichever position 1 or 2 you programmed with the transmitter being used to unlock the vehicle is the one that will be recalled To select a setting and move on to the next feature press I while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Easy Exit Seat under Memory Seat on page 1 5 for more information Alarm Warning Press 1 until ALARM WARNING BOTH appears in the display To select your preference for alarm warning press lt while ALARM WARNING BOTH is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings ALARM WARNING BOTH default The headlamps will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is active ALARM WARNING HORN The horn will chirp when the alarm is active ALARM WARNING LAMPS The headlamps will flash when the alarm is active ALARM WARNING OFF There will be no alarm warning on activation To s
362. plus one quarter turn 3 112 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear radio reception If the vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open Chime Level Adjustment The radio is used to adjust the vehicle s chime level To change the volume level of the chime press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power off The volume level will change from the normal level to loud and LOUD CHIME will appear on the radio display To change back to the default or normal setting press and hold pushbutton 6 again The volume level will change from the loud level to normal and NORMAL CHIME will appear on the radio display Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes Section 4 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 4 2 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 00 4 2 Defensive Driving eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 4 2 Drunk Driving 225 haar bre eden hase camtereawemersnesy 4 3 Control of a Vehicle ss alanere enn 4 3 Braking 2 lt ecicicn St reen he ener ed 4 4 Antilock Brake System ABS a e 4 5 Braking in Emergencies eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 4 6 StabiliTrak System cccccccccccseeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 Locking Rear Axle ccseeee
363. press the SEEK button to go to the next track on the CD This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD While a CD is playing in the six disc CD player press and hold the SEEK button for two seconds to go to the next CD if multiple CDs are loaded This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening toa CD Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN The radio does not operate and LOCKED displays if the radio is stolen or moved to a different vehicle When the when the ignition is in the off position a blinking red light on the upper left side of the radio indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed 3 110 Audio Steering Wheel Controls Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on the vehicle s options Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel Mute Voice Recognition For vehicles with OnStar or Bluetooth systems press to interact with those systems See OnStar System on page 2 43 and Bluetooth on page 3 86 in this manual for more information If the vehicle does not have OnStar press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again or any other radio button to turn on the sound PROG Program Press to play a station that has been programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons The radio seeks pr
364. pressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder functions do not function on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT Order of Play Tracks are played in the following order e If CD audio tracks are available they will be played first otherwise play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e If the CD does not contain any playlists then play begins from the first track under the root directory When all tracks from the root directory have played play continues from files according to their numerical listing After playing the last track from the last folder play begins again at the first track of the first folder or root directory
365. r belt should fit snugly against your body A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way 1 20 Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs 1 21 Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle 1 22 A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this The belt is over an armrest A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes
366. r CD that is currently playing through the RSE Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place Both sets of rear seat headphones may include foam ear pads The foam ear pads can become worn or damaged if they are not handled or stored properly They can be replaced separately from the headphone set The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs See your dealer retailer for more information Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones 1 Loosen the screw to the battery door on the left side of the headphones and slide open 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Install correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place 3 97 Stereo RCA Jacks The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system Standard RCA cables not included are needed to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks The yellow connector inputs video and the red and white
367. r onstar ca Canada or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services described below or for a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in the glove box or visit onstar com U S or onstar ca Canada contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week 2 43 OnStar Services Available with the Safe amp Sound Plan Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Advanced Automatic Crash Notification AACN If equipped Link to Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics OnStar Hands Free Calling with 30 trial minutes OnStar Virtual Advisor U S Only OnStar Services Included with Directions amp Connections Plan All Safe and Sound Plan Services OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation If equipped or Driving Directions Advisor delivered RideAssist Information and Convenience Services 2 44 OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and can be used with OnStar Pre Paid
368. r preference for perimeter lighting press H while PERIMETER LIGHTS ON is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings PERIMETER LIGHTS ON default The headlamps and back up lamps will come on for 40 seconds if it is dark enough outside when you unlock the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter PERIMETER LIGHTS OFF The perimeter lights will not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter To select a setting and move on to the next feature press I while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 59 Easy Exit Seat Press 1 until EASY EXIT SEAT OFF appears in the display To select your preference for seat position exit press lt while EASY EXIT SEAT OFF is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings EASY EXIT SEAT OFF default No seat exit recall will occur EASY EXIT SEAT ON The driver s seat will move to the exit position when the key is removed from the ignition To select a setting and move on to the next feature press i while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Easy Exit Seat under Memory Seat on page 1 5 for more information 3 60 Seat Recall Press 1 until SEAT RECALL OFF appears in the display To select your preference for recall of the driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals if your vehicle has this feature press lt while SEAT RECALL OFF is dis
369. r retailer for service See Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light on page 3 44 for further information Shifting Into Four Wheel High or Automatic Four Wheel Drive Turn the knob to Four Wheel High or Automatic Four Wheel Drive This can be done at any speed unless you are shifting out of Four Wheel Low The indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain on when the shift is complete Shifting Into Two Wheel High Turn the knob to Two Wheel High This can be done at any speed unless you are shifting out of Four Wheel Low Shifting Into Four Wheel Low To shift to Four Wheel Low the vehicle s engine must be running and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 2 mph 3 2 km h with the transmission in N Neutral The preferred method for shifting into Four Wheel Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Turn the knob to Four Wheel Low You must wait for the Four Wheel Low indicator light to stop flashing and stay on before shifting the transmission into gear If you turn the knob to Four Wheel Low when the vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Low indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 2 mph 3 2 km h and the transmission is in N Neutral After 30 seconds the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen Shifting Out of Four Wheel Low To shift from Four Wheel Low to Four Wheel High Auto Four
370. rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick For vehicles with the 4 2L L6 engine the level should be at the C Cold mark For vehicles with the 5 3L V8 engine the level should be at the FULL mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always use the proper fluid Notice Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 33 Windshield Washer Fluid Notice When using concentrated washer fluid follow What to Use the manufacturer s instructions for adding When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid be Water sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the Water can cause the solution to freeze and temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has damage your washer fluid tank and other parts sufficient protection against freezing of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs whi
371. raint system secured in a rear seating position In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly 1 33 A CAUTION Never do this Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 34 A CAUTION Never do this Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The child might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restr
372. rammed to the vehicle all remaining transmitters must also be programmed Any lost or stolen transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATTERY LOW message displays in the DIC See KEY FOB BATTERY LOW under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 for additional information Notice When replacing the battery do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter Static from your body could damage the transmitter To replace the battery 1 Separate the transmitter with a flat thin object inserted into the slot between the covers of the transmitter housing 2 Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object 3 Insert the new battery Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery 4 Snap the transmitter back together Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle You can use the remote keyless entry system You can use your key to unlock your door from the outside Door Locks ACAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive You ca
373. re sicvnewecssesgedcesereiaeesaveiactovaadeasseente 5 Appearance Care ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 Interior Cleaning 2 2 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 Fabric Carpet 22522 cacnieecsmennetenmeasietna ganinndanas 5 Leather ss SIE ED ERR ME 5 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUMACES csere ennenen eiia Ea 5 Care of Safety Belts u ssseseveeeererennene 5 106 Weatherstrips 55 anseelse irsk us 5 106 Washing Your Vehicle 1 W ssssssesereereeesrsrnen 5 107 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 5 107 Finish Care siccisisisiver tetepe en 5 108 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 108 Aluminum Wheels ceeeeeeeeneeeeeee eee ens 5 109 WMS arrota aaa ll EEA 5 109 Sheet Metal Damage W W W W ssseeeeeeereerenerere 5 109 Finish Damage 2 eee alene ede 5 110 Underbody Maintenance u usssseseeeeeesrersenen 5 110 Chemical Paint Spotting ssseeeeeerereee 5 110 Vehicle Identification cee 5 111 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 5 111 Service Parts Identification Label 5 111 Electrical System ccceceeeeeeee eee eeee teens 5 112 Add On Electrical Equipment 6 eeeee 5 112 Headlamp oirrne rea ana aa 5 112 Windshield Wiper Fuses ccnn 5 112 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 112 Fuses and Circuit Breakers a n 5 113 Engine Compartment Fuse Block
374. re starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a room around the vehicle level surface 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake brake See Parking Brake on page 2 33 on page 2 33 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if turn off the engine immediately if it starts the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to ON RUN should start only in P Park or N Neutral If the but do not start the engine Without applying the vehicle starts in any other position contact regular brake try to move the shift lever out your dealer retailer for service of P Park with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of P Park contact your dealer retailer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift lever position The ignition should turn to LOCK OFF only when the shift lever is in P Park The ignition key should come out only in LOCK OFF Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P Park Mechanism Check ACAUTION When you are doing this check the vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be
375. re until the wipers start then release it The wipers will stop after one wipe Hold the band on mist longer if more wipe cycles are needed O Off Turns the wipers off SY Windshield Wipers Turn the band to control the windshield wipers i Turn the band to set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes The closer to the top of the lever the shorter the delay time For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings For high speed wiping turn the band further to the second solid band past the delay settings Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they are frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them If they become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Windshield Washer WY Windshield Washer Press the windshield washer paddle to spray washer fluid on the windshield The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to the preset speed A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Rear Window Wiper Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision The rear window washer control is located to the right of the steeri
376. re worn or damaged See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 50 and Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades on page 5 108 for more information e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also see Checking the Restraint Systems on page 1 70 f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl rear compartment hinges outer liftgate handle pivot points rear door detent link roller mechanism liftgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door hinge cargo door hinge locks and folding seat hardware More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g Inspect hoses for cracks chafing leaks kinks and proper installation h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or de
377. rease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash accident When changing a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 88 11 Put the nuts on by hand Make sure the cone shaped end is toward the wheel 12 Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub If a nut cannot be turned by hand use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible 5 95 CAUTION Continued replace them be sure to get new originalequipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 120 for wheel nut torque specification Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque 13 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle specification See Capacities and Specifications on counterclockwise Lower the jack completely page 5 120 for the wheel nut torque specification A CAUTION Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel 14 Use the wrench to
378. receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer XM Lock The XM receiver in your vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault this message will alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Consult with your dealer retailer Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer Chk XMRevr If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver may have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer Check XM If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer 3 85 Navigation Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system see the separate Navigation System manual Bluetooth Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls The system can be used while the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft 9 1 m Not all phones supp
379. restraint system for more information can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 32 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 35 1 57 Where Are the Airbags The right front passenger s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side The driver s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 58 ae ee Taa E Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar The roof rail airbags for the driver right front passenger and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows ACAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked 1 59 When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and che
380. rgo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow If towing a trailer the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 for more information about the vehicle s maximum load capacity The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight up to a maximum or 400 Ibs 181 kg with a weight carrying hitch The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight up toa maximum of 900 Ibs 408 kg with a weight distributing hitch 4 49 Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle After loading the trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer Trailering may be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weig
381. ricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Chassis Lubricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol GM Part No U S 12346293 in Canada 992723 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Usage Fluid Lubricant Hood and Door Hinges Body Door Hinge Pins Liftgate Hinge and Linkage Folding Seats and Fuel Door Hinge Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points and Hinges Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Weatherstrip Lubricant GM Part No U S 3634770 in Canada 10953518 or Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No U S 12345579 in Canada 992887 Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No U S 12371287 in Canada 10953437 Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Automatic Transmission Filter Kit Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Oil Filter 4 2L L6 Engine PF61 5 3L V8 Engine PF48 Spark Plugs 4 2L L6 Engine 41 103 5 3L V8 Engine 41 985 Wiper Blades Front 22 in 56 cm 12
382. rive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy If you need more power for passing and you are Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and have more power Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 4 12 D Drive can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You may want to shift the transmission to 3 Third or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often 3 Third This position is also used for normal driving It reduces vehicle speed more than D Drive without using the brakes You might choose 3 Third instead of D Drive when driving on hilly winding roads when towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears and when going down a steep hill 2 27 To shift to the 3 Third position you must first press the large button on the shift handle While the button is pressed move the shifter in the 3 Third position 2 Second This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 3 Third without using the brakes You can use 2 Second on hills It can help you control vehicle speed as you go down steep Mountain roads as you use your
383. riving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly Causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 63 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle 5 71 Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this could affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes rollover airbags traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected A CAUTION
384. rking properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim rearview mirror front sensors rollover sensor module or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger s position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger s seat The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers upholstery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed under or on top of the seat fabric could also A interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 64 If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 If your vehicle has rollover roof rail airbags
385. rn of engine overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on the vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 37 for more information If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot Engine Overheated message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 for more information You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears but instead get service help right away See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 lf you do decide to lift the hood make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced Notice Engine damage from running the engine without coolant is not covered by the warranty Notice If the engine catches fire because of being driven with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment ACAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep dri
386. ror message write it down and provide it to your dealer retailer when reporting the problem Listening to a DVD If the vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system and a DVD is playing the DVD symbol displays indicating that the DVD is available and can be listened to through the vehicle s speakers To listen to the DVD press the CD AUX button until RSE displays The current radio source stops and the DVD sound comes through the speakers To stop listening to the DVD press the CD AUX button if a CD is loaded or press the BAND button to select a different source When the RSE system is turned off the DVD symbol goes off of the radio display and RSE OFF displays The radio returns to the last radio source that was playing See Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 96 for more information 3 79 Using an MP3 MP3 WMA Disc MP3 WMA Format If you burn an MP3 disc on a personal computer Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R disc Standard audio MP3 files and WMA files can be mixed on one CD Make sure playlists have a mp3 or wpl extension other file extensions might not work Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or variable bit rates Song title artist name and album is available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one fo
387. rs on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 American Petroleum Institute API starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Cold Temperature Operation If in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 engine oil Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures Always use an oil that meets the required specification GM6094M See What Kind of Engine Oil to Use for more information Engine Oil Additives Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change t
388. ry transmitter a second time If the key is inserted in the ignition this feature will not lock the doors See Lockout Protection on page 2 11 You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off If the feature is turned off the doors will lock immediately when a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter lock button is pressed Programming Delayed Locking To turn the delayed locking feature on or off do the following 1 Press and hold the power door lock switch on the driver s door in the lock position 2 Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button twice If the delayed locking feature was on it will now be off If the feature was off it will now be on Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock unlock feature which enables you to program your vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC or by the following method See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 56 Programmable Locking Feature Following are the two locking modes that can be programmed Mode 1 All doors lock when the transmission is shifted out of P Park Mode 2 All doors lock when the vehicle speed is greater than 8 mph 13 km h The automatic door locks were pre programmed at the factory to lock all the doors when the transmission is shifted into gear The following instructions detail how to program your door locks
389. s later in this section When programming a garage door park outside of the garage Park directly in line with and facing the garage door opener motor head or gate motor head Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being programmed It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 2 47 Programming the Universal Home Remote System For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 800 355 3515 or go to www homelink com Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before starting Otherwise the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated To program up to three devices 1 From inside the vehicle press and hold down the two outside buttons at the same time releasing only when the Universal Home Remote indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds This step will erase the factory settings or all previously programmed buttons 2 48 Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons Hold the end of your hand held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator light in view The hand held transmitter was
390. s 5 49 LiftgatesLittGlass za a eee enhed 2 12 Liftglass Litgate sisii bens seler ieni aas 2 12 Light Airbag Readiness u u sssseeeeereerse serene nes 3 31 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning 3 36 Brake System Warning ceeceeeeeeeee eee ees 3 35 Change Engine Oil cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 43 Charging System c cceeeeeeeeeeeeee sanne 3 33 Check Gages Warning ceeeeeeeeeneeeeen eens 3 45 Check Gas Cap ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 47 CRUISE GOntIOL sci ads are le aiseee anai 3 43 Gate Ajar rean na IE EN 3 45 Highbeam OM sadler isnie annik 3 44 Low Fuel Warning 53 rese narr unen 3 47 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 32 Reduced Engine Power seeeeeeeeeeeee es 3 44 Safety Belt Reminders ceeeseeeeeeeneees 3 30 SCUM akaona neii e a E EN e iaa 3 43 Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light 3 44 StabiliTrak Service ceeeeeeeeeee terete een eees 3 36 StabiliTrak Indicator ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 37 Tire Pressuke ornada nna aa S 3 38 Lighting ENUY SE E S 3 16 E E E E 3 17 MEIGS hemnet i anc set name e a IEE 3 13 Flash t0 PaSS orei aaa n EE 3 8 High Low Beam Changer W Wu u u dccseeereererererere 3 8 On Reminder cccc eee c cece eee ee en eeeeeeeaeaeees 3 14 Loading Your Vehicle scriitor nanese 4 31 Locking Rear AXIS wscccieiccisccitensiesnsarenseeeacietedacss 4 10 Loc
391. s electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enables the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver s and right front passenger s seat The sensors provide information that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment Your vehicle has roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 1 55 Roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes In addition these roof rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover Roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts near frontal impacts or rear impacts Both roof rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the i
392. s features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about the vehicle s features and controls Pictures symbols and words work together to explain vehicle operation Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Litho in U S A Part No 25820781 A First Printing Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 helminc com Propri taires Canadiens On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais aupr s de concessionnaire ou a l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 helminc com Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found 2008 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do not do this or Do not let this happen A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning ACAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid or reduce the hazard Read thes
393. s if necessary Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 4 2L L6 engine here is what you will see FE Kl TT G re ick 5 12 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 20 Engine Coolant Recovery Tank See Cooling System on page 5 24 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 34 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 33 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick Out of View See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 21 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Radiator Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 5 24 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Remote Negative Terminal Marked GND See Jump Starting on page 5 39 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 35 Battery See Battery on page 5 38 Engine Compartment Fuse Block See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5 113 When you open the hood on the 5 3L V8 engine here is what you will see Wa 8 FS w l ND tie M S MM Y SW OSL a BK ARTS SNE Sf PASS i 5 14
394. s in Foreign Countries ssssseeeeeereree 5 7 Filling the Tank wan cciseeccecteectsnnntecasnocdiees cdeti ges 5 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 00 5 10 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 10 Hood Release unread rrr eaaa 5 11 Engine Compartment Overview 5 12 Engine Oil sssrinin roie E 5 15 Engine Oil Life System e eee 5 18 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 0 ee 5 20 Automatic Transmission Fluid eeeeee 5 21 Cooling System ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeatenes 5 24 Engine Coolant nr hk e enanar 5 25 Engine Overheating ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eee ees 5 30 Engine Fan Noise 0 cecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeereees 5 32 Power Steering Fluid ccceeeeeeeeeeeee teen ees 5 33 Windshield Washer Fluid eeeeeeeeee eee es 5 34 Brakes vsio nosier aparas blir E sheer Ea 5 35 Battery eani rnare en EEr E A daemons 5 38 JUMP Staning eiers ener eee 5 39 Rear Axle 23233 areas erne NS RE see 5 43 Four Wheel Drive aaen 5 44 Front AXIG ocitne een EEN steeds 5 44 Headlamp Aiming ceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ee es 5 45 Bulb Replacement annn 5 46 Halogen BUDS arine me ran a 5 46 Headlamps mesinna E 5 46 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parkingi LAMPS siinne ninn 5 47 Taillamps Turn Signal and Stoplamps 5 47 B ck Up Lamps maiestre eaea 5 48 License Plate Lamp seeeeeeeeeeee
395. s per gallon MPG liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km or kilometers per liter km L your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving conditions Press and hold the select button for one second while AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel economy Average fuel economy will then be calculated starting from that point If the average fuel economy is not reset it will be continually updated each time you drive Engine Oil Life System Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life It will show 100 when the system is reset after an oil change It will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Engine Oil on page 5 15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Customization Button i Customization Press the customization button to access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize the settings to your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 56 for more information Select Button 4 Select Press the select button to reset certain DIC functions turn off or ackn
396. s present in a child restraint The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 32 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on may inflate the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat 1 65 When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and s
397. s used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information A Accessories and Modifications sssseererereee 5 3 Accessory Power Outlets cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment 4 38 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped MLS ore REE REE RE acide ER A E AEA 1 69 Additives Fuel ccccccceeee eee eeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeees 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment eeeeeee 5 112 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 23 Air Cleaner Filter Engine cceceeeeeeeeeeees 5 20 Air Conditioning cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 19 3 22 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator 0 0ee 3 32 Readiness Light c ciccccienenesnieechatuaressscennedtncte 3 31 Airbag System senio Arete si eal i ebber seek 1 55 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle siii enia a oae aan E NEEE 1 69 How Does an Airbag Restrain 1 62 Passenger Sensing System eeeeeeeeeees 1 64 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 68 What Makes an Airbag Inflate
398. same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible ACAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provided with Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ACAUTION Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 2 37 A CAUTION Over inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured Be sure to read the vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit To use the jack and spare tire see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 88 To use the tire sealant and compre
399. scular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of the vehicle Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Braking
400. se recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 5 70 Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message come on and stay on TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you rotate your vehicle s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If increasing the tire s air pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key You have two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If i
401. see Shifting Out of Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 4 44 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System With this feature an electronically controlled air suspension system automatically keeps the vehicle level as it is loaded and unloaded The system includes a compressor two height sensors and two air springs supporting the rear axle The system also has an internal clock to prevent overheating if the inflator is used for prolonged periods lf the system overheats all leveling function stops until the system cools down The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate in order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height after loading The system can lower the vehicle to the standard ride height after unloading with the ignition on and also for up to 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off The compressor may be heard while it is operating when the vehicle is being loaded and periodically as the system adjusts the vehicle to the standard ride height Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator hose attached to the inflator outlet Remove the inflator hose from the outlet during loading and unloading If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time some bleed down of the suspension is normal Upon starting the vehicle proper height will be achieved Overload Protection The air suspension system is equipped with overload protection Overload protection is des
402. see your dealer retailer for service 5 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON within ten seconds of removing the previous key The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 6 Repeat the Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to be programmed If the security light comes on and stays on while driving you will be able to restart the engine if you turn it off The theft deterrent system however is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer retailer Your vehicle is not protected by the theft deterrent system at this time In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle Starting and Operating Your Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time the new brake Vehicle linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in New Vehicle Break In guideline every time you get new brake linings Notice The vehicle does not need an elaborate Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing break in But it will perform better in the long run if a Trailer on page 4 46 for the trailer towing you follow these guidelines capabilities of the vehicle and more
403. sees 1 4 FO ACh carine sti tiation A 3 19 Engine Coolant siciediccisnccetiisendeliveiecniasinn 2 24 ga SE UT ST Ree SR ses eO se ERE DERE BEER ASE entnesanse cats 3 22 Highbeam On Light W W u u ssseeneeeerereree renere renee 3 44 High Speed Operation Tires eseeeeeeeeeees 5 62 Highway Hypnosis 225565 orde she ne 4 26 Hill and Mountain Roads ce 4 27 Hood Checking Things Under a oa 5 10 Release arie anelser 5 11 RONTE eee Ens AEA E a EEE 3 6 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 1 1 1 1 18 Ignition POSITIONS iiien peeeaeseeosalans 2 21 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 35 Inflation Tire Pressure ccccceeeee eee eeeeeeeees 5 60 ntlator Kit Tie arr e 5 77 Instrument Panel Brightness 52t nen barber cenciataracndan 3 16 163 F RS ST Mess ees ES EEN ENS 3 28 OVeRVI SW ass hore renen AD aa Ea 3 4 JUMP STAMING kisra nnana eian ans 5 39 Keyless Entry System 0 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 4 KEYS E E saledes 2 3 Labeling Tire Sidewall ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 54 Lamp Malfunction Indicator ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 38 Lamps DOME acar A 3 16 Dome Lamp Override erscenirroriisiineeiisiesa 3 16 RE AGING cicsdeacdaseties nea sl oser ee 3 17 Lap Shoulder Belt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 1 27 LATCH System for Child Restraints 0 1 43 License Plate Lamps eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
404. seful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall The following illustration is an example of a typical P Metric tire sidewall TPC SPEC 1153 yg 75 pr er Dy over wwe 20809 KOR XL VA ne Hov HL og uv Passenger P Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufactur
405. serted upside down if the disc is not readable or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player Load Eject Error This message displays if the disc is not properly loaded or ejected Disc Play Error This message displays if the DVD player cannot play the disc Scratched or damaged discs cause this error Region Code Error This message displays if the region code of the DVD is not compatible with the region code of the DVD player No Disc This message displays if any of the buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player DVD Distortion There can be an experience with audio distortion in the wireless headphones when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Positioning Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System Cleaning the Video Screen Use isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth and gently wipe the video screen Do not spray directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or too long on the video screen Rear Seat Audio RSA This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any of the sources radio CDs or DVDs However the rear seat passengers can only control the sources that are not being listened by the front seat passengers For example rear seat passengers can
406. set station 2 Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select the equalization setting Once the equalization no longer displays the equalization is set for that preset station 3 67 Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble AUDIO Press and turn to adjust the Tone 1 Push and release until BASS MID midrange without Bose or TREB treble displays 2 Turn to increase or to decrease the tone The display shows the bass midrange without Bose or treble level If a station is weak or has static decrease the treble To adjust the bass midrange without Bose or treble to the middle position while it is displayed push and hold AUDIO The radio produces one beep and adjusts the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold AUDIO when no tone or speaker controls displays ALL CENTERED displays and a beep is heard AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press to select customized equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical 3 68 To return the bass and treble to the manual mode push and release this button until CUSTOM displays The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source If the radio has the Bose audio system the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO Press and turn to adjust the speakers To adjust the b
407. sily using this number Your selling dealer retailer should also have this number Notice If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you ever get locked out of your vehicle call the Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry RKE system it operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range try this Check the distance The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other v
408. sition This vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 42 In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 64 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 32 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys ACAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child CAUTION Continued 1 52 CAUTION Continued restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child re
409. soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low oil pressure Change Engine Oil Light Your vehicle may have a change engine oil light When this light comes on it means that an oil change and other maintenance procedures are required for your vehicle See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Engine Oil on page 5 15 for more information Once the engine oil has been changed the change engine oil light must be reset Until it is reset the light will stay on when the engine is on Security Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 16 Cruise Control Light If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC y this light will come on when the cruise control is set See Cruise Control on page 3 10 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 51 for more information 3 43 Reduced Engine Power Light This light comes on when a noticeable reduction in the vehicle
410. spected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface The proper level is from 0 to 0 40 inch 0 to 10 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle What to Use To determine what kind of lubricant to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 43 Four Wheel Drive Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 5 44 If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you will need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use To determine what kind of lubricant to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Front Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface lf the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the front axle y
411. splay To select your preference for automatic locking press lt while LOCK DOORS IN GEAR is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings LOCK DOORS IN GEAR default The doors will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of P Park LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED The doors will lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds To select a setting and move on to the next feature press i while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 9 for more information Unlock Doors Press 1 until UNLOCK DOORS IN PARK appears in the display To select your preference for automatic unlocking press lt while UNLOCK DOORS IN PARK is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings UNLOCK DOORS IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK The driver s door will be unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into P Park UNLOCK DOORS KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY The doors will not be unlocked automatically To select a setting and move on to the next feature press I while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 9 for more information 3 57 Lock Feedback Press 1 until LOCK FEEDBACK BOTH appears i
412. ssor kit see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5 77 and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure Do not exceed the recommended pressure 5 77 A CAUTION Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit there may not be a spare tire tire changing equipment and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store a tire The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily seal punctures up to 1 4 inch 6 mm in the tread area of the tire It can also be used to inflate an under inflated tire 5 78 If the tire has been separated from the wheel has damaged sidewalls or has a large puncture the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions This vehicle may have one of the following tire sealant and compressor kits The kit includes gow Tire Sealant Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealan
413. st However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform 1 60 e If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle ha
414. st three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture High Speed Operation A CAUTION Driving at high speeds 100 mph 160 km h or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load 5 62 If your vehicle has P255 50R20 104V size tires installed on the rear axle they will require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds above 99 mph
415. straint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 64 for additional information If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 43 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 43 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap Must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 32 2 Put the child restraint
416. system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 43 for how and where to install your child restraint using LATCH If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 43 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 42 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 49 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Position the release button o
417. system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed See Filling the Tank on page 5 8 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off e If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water the vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause stalling after start up stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up If one or more of these conditions occurs change the fuel brand used It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 If none of the above have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle The dealer retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincia
418. t lf the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations gl Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Second Row To assist you in locating the lower anchors each seating position with lower anchors has two labels near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion The labels are located above a flap at the base of the seatback in the rear outside seating positions The anchors are located under the flap In order to get to the anchors you will need to pull the strap at the center of the seat where the seat cushion meets the seatback This will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out of the way Lift the flap to expose the anchors and then lower the seat cushion Be sure the cushion is locked into place 1 45 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 42 for additional information Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the child restraint will not be able to protect the
419. t canister The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer retailer See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister following There is only enough sealant to seal one tire After usage the sealant canister and sealant air hose assembly must be replaced See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister following Selector Switch E Tire Sealant Canister Sealant Air or F Sealant Air Hose Air Only Clear On Off Button G Air Only Hose Pressure Gage Black Pressure Deflation H Power Plug Button If equipped 5 79 Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures warm the kit in a heated environment for 5 minutes This will help to inflate the tire faster Always do a safety check first See f a Tire Goes Flat on page 5 76 Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire 1 Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage on page 5 87 2 Unwrap the sealant air hose F and the power plug H 5 80 3 Place the kit on the ground Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it
420. t Forward Press to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding press again This button might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Play Pause Press to start play of a DVD or CD Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it Press again to continue the play of the DVD or CD When the DVD is playing press this button then press the fast forward button The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode To cancel slow play mode press this button gt Next Track Chapter Press to advance to the beginning of the next track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 3 105 Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries 1 Remove the battery compartment door located on the bottom of the remote control 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Close the battery door securely If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place 3 106 No power Disc will not play The picture does not fill the screen There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out The ignition might not be in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY The parental control button might have been turned o
421. t is not too steep to drive down might be too steep to drive across The vehicle could roll over Never go downhill with the transmission in N Neutral called free wheeling The brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill e What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden pas but if it happens when going downhill creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks 1 Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and If you decide you can go down a hill safely try to keep the vehicle headed straight down Use a low gear so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping the vehicle under control at all times A CAUTION Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control apply the parking brake Shift to P Park and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine will not start get out and get help 4 21 Driving Across an Incline An off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill To decide whether to try to drive across the incline consider the following A CAUTION
422. t slots D A Claw in Notch B Correct Installation C Incorrect Installation Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield 5 51 Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park rest position 2 Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle 3 Rotate the wiper blade assembly and pull it off of the wiper arm Hold the wiper arm in position and push the blade away from the wiper arm 5 52 4 Replace the wiper blade 5 Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest position Tires CAUTION Continued Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 Overinflated tires are more likely
423. t takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you need to start over The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below 1 2 3 4 Set the parking brake Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off Turn the headlamp control from off to parking lamps four times within three seconds A double horn chirp will sound and the TPMS low tire warning light will begin to flash The double horn chirp and flashing TPMS warning light indicate that the TPMS matching process has started The TPMS warning light should continue flashing throughout the matching procedure Start with the driver side front tire Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for 10 seconds then stop and listen for a single horn chirp The single horn chirp should sound within 15 seconds confirming that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position If you do not hear the confirming single horn chirp you will need to start over with step number one Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 After
424. t with the about the vehicle during a collision or sudden pocket located on the opposite side of the trim maneuver Someone could be injured If the cover panel and release is removed always store it in the proper storage location When it is replaced always be sure that it is securely reattached 3 Grasp the handle and unroll the cover 4 Latch the posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle to secure it 2 54 Cargo Tie Downs Four cargo tie downs are located in the rear compartment of the vehicle The tie downs can be used to secure small loads Sunroof The vehicle may have a power sliding sunroof To open or close the sunroof the ignition must be turned to ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 22 Press and release the back of the control in the overhead console to open the sunroof Press the front of the control to close the sunroof lea Once the sunroof is closed press the forward side of the control to open the sunroof to the vent position The sunroof has a sunshade which can be pulled forward to block sun rays If it is in the closed position it will open when the sunroof opens Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time while the vehicle is not in use Debris can collect in the tracks damage the sunroof operation and plug the water draining system 2 55 42 NOTES 2 56 Section 3 Instr
425. tays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 for more information including important safety information 1 66 If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove the child restraint from the vehicle 3 Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 4 Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1 52 5 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit turn the vehicle off Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion if adjustable to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint See Head Restraints on page 1 10 6 Restart the vehicle If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer retailer If the Off Indicator is Lit for an If
426. te gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you These problems can be avoided by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 4 4 It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery The vehicle s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pa
427. th all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed See Maintenance Record on page 6 16 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 5 6 for additional information
428. th on page 6 9 Inspect brake system See footnote a Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed 33774 Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section Inspect suspension and steering components See footnote Inspect engine cooling system Seefoomote e J Inspectwiper blades Seefoomoed inspect restraint system components See oomo a ss ll Lubricate body components See footnote f Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed See footnote g Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80 000 ae 000 La 000 2000 000 esac 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks oe Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 20 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter severe service See footnotes g and h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service See footnote g Automatic transfer case only Change transfer case fluid See footnote g Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service V8 engine only Inspect spark p
429. the NGMICIC iere saena a E E 5 5 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 California Proposition 65 Warning 06 5 4 Doing Your Own Work eee 5 4 Engine Soon Lamp c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ees 3 38 Four Wheel Drive Warning Light 3 44 Publications Ordering Information 00 7 15 Service Scheduling Appointments 0 7 10 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 68 Setting the CIOCK ccceeceeeeeeeeeee irii 3 63 11 Sheet Metal Damage 0 ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee ees 5 109 Shifting Into Park 22 uber eee eeneeeeenes 2 34 Shifting Out of Park 2 c0cv0 siete 2 36 Signals Turn and Lane Change 0 eeeeeee 3 7 SNOW PIOW scidacacesdiaasdintcineanctescemedeoeseaeigthel anes 4 38 Spare Vite sa nr arenaen be 5 102 lAstalling masiina secret 5 92 REMOVING aene e E RSA 5 89 SIONN aee e an bre E E E ERE 5 100 Specifications Capacities u sssseeeerereereee 5 120 Speedometer 52255 iian riie ENEE Esaa 3 29 StabiliTrak Service Light 1 1 W W sssseeeererererreree 3 36 StabiliTrak Indicator Light ccccccceeeeeeeees 3 37 StabiliTrak System sssssseeeveeeeeeeeeerrr nerne 4 6 Starting the Engine 22522 sede rasian riseg 2 22 SIENNO ernieren aerea er EEE EAEAN EEE ER 4 10 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 3 110 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel
430. the engine running The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set If you have four wheel drive the vehicle will be free to roll even if your lever is in P Park if the transfer case is in Neutral So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not Neutral See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running unless you have to If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running be sure the vehicle is in P Park and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you have moved the shift lever into P Park hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from P Park without first pressing the button on the console shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P Park Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into P Park properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P Park This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P Park properly before you leave the driver seat To find out how see Shifting Into P
431. the cellular phone and follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3 The system prompts for a name for the phone Use a name that best describes the phone This name will be used to indicate which phone is connected The system then confirms the name provided The system responds with lt Phone name gt has been successfully paired after the pairing process is complete Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to be paired 3 87 Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say List The system lists all the paired Bluetooth devices If a phone is connected to the vehicle the system will say Is connected after the connected phone Deleting a Paired Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Delete The system asks which phone to delete followed by a tone 4 Say the name of the phone to be deleted If the phone name is unknown use the List command for a list of all paired phones The system responds with Would you like to delete lt phone name gt Yes or No followed by a tone 5
432. the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on leather 5 105 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s int
433. the time of day and the ID3 tag song name 3 83 To change the default on the display press the DISPL knob until the desired display appears then press and hold this knob for two seconds The radio produces one beep and the selected display becomes the default INFO Information INFO displays when a current track has ID3 tag information Press INFO to display the artist name and album contained in the tag INFO disappears from the display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished BAND Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD remains inside the radio for future listening CD AUX Auxiliary Press to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded A Eject Press to eject a CD Eject can activate while either the ignition or the radio is off CDs can be loaded while the ignition and the radio is off if this button is pressed first 3 84 XM Radio Messages xL Explicit Language Channels These channels or any others can be blocked by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No Signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return No Signl The system is functioning correctly but the vehi
434. ther to the top tether anchor if equipped Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 2 1 Find the top tether anchor 2 2 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If your vehicle has a cargo shade route the top tether between the seatback and the cargo shade If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback 1 48 If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback For vehicles that have a headrest or head restraint fold down the headrest or head restraint and route the single tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 11 If the position you are using has a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether around the headrest or head restraint 3 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If your child restraint has the LATCH
435. this happens use the following steps to allow the Adult Size Occupant system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 3 Place the seatback in the fully upright position 4 Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with legs comfortably extended 5 Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat 1 67 Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific v
436. tional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance A WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 5 73 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
437. tions weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 5 58 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturers recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indi
438. tle they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap Remove the pressure cap 5 28 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL coolant 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL mixture up to the base of the filler neck See COLD mark Engine Coolant on page 5 25 for more information 5 Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank about the proper coolant mixture but leave the radiator pressure cap off 5 29 6 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan 7 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck 5 30 8 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to wa
439. to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them See High Speed Operation on page 5 62 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving A CAUTION Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 31 CAUTION Continued 5 53 Low Profile Performance Tire If your vehicle has P255 50R20 size tires they are Classified as low profile performance tires These tires are designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement You may also notice more road noise with low profile performance tires and that they tend to wear faster Notice If the vehicle has low profile tires they are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires Tire and or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes or sharp edged objects or when sliding into a curb The vehicle warranty does not cover this type of damage Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and when possible avoid contact with curbs potholes and other road hazards 5 54 Tire Sidewall Labeling U
440. to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law A WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 5 74 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels whic
441. tral CAUTION Continued 5 88 CAUTION Continued 4 Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle When the vehicle has a flat tire B use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks A A Wheel Block B Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jacking equipment needed to remove the spare tire is stored under the rear seat To release the jack from its holder turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 11 for more information 5 89 The tools you will be using include Wheel Wrench Wheel Blocks Extension s Socket End OW gt 5 90 D Handle Jack End E Jack To remove the underbody mounted spare from your vehicle Notice If you remove or restow a tire from to the storage position under the vehicle while it is supported by a jack you could damage the tire and or your vehicle Always remove or restow a tire when the vehicle is on the ground A moog w Wheel Wrench Hoist Shaft Extension Retainer Spare or Flat Tire Valve Stem Pointed U
442. ts by turning the nuts one Do not remove them yet Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to raise the jack lift head Place the handle extension and wheel wrench onto the jack turn counterclockwise C 6 Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest C D E Rear Position Front Position D Extension s E Wheel Wrench Front Frame Rear Axle Jack Handle the flat tire 5 93 A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make 7 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into ground so there is enough room for the spare the proper location before raising the vehicle tire to fit 5 94 8 Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire 9 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 10 Place the spare tire on the wheel mounting surface ACAUTION ACAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an Never use oil or g
443. tton is pressed Notice Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid 3 21 Dual Automatic Climate Control System With this system the heating cooling and ventilation can be controlled on the vehicle When the vehicle is first started and the climate control system is on or if the climate control system has been turned on the display shows the driver s temperature setting for five seconds Then it shows the outside temperature F G H A Driver and Passenger F Recirculation Side Temperature G Air Conditioning Controls H Defrost B Fan Control I Air Delivery Mode C Display Control D AUTO J Rear Window E Power Button Defogger Outside Air Temperature Display A new outside temperature reading is displayed if the vehicle has been off for more than three hours If the vehicle has been off for less than three hours the old temperature reading may be displayed because underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature Underhood heat can also affect the outside temperature while the engine is running It may also take several minutes of driving before the display updates to the actual outside temperature Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When automatic operation is active t
444. uetooth System The cellular phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position During a call with the audio on the cell phone press for more than two seconds The audio switches from the cell phone to the vehicle 3 94 Voice Pass Thru Voice Pass Thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone See the cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature This feature can be used to verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Voice The system responds with OK accessing lt phone name gt The cell phone s normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone s operating instructions Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Tones The in vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and numbers stored as name tags during a call This is used when calling a menu driven phone system Account numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls Sending a Number During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone S
445. uid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades Bugs road grime sap and a buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by Extreme dusty conditions Sand and salt Heat and sun Snow and ice without proper removal Aluminum Wheels Notice Using strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because the surface could be damaged Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes could damage the aluminum or chrome p
446. uld be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL can cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX COOL This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low If there is a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 30 5 25 What to Use A CAUTION Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 26 Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant If using this mixture nothing else needs to be added T
447. ument Panel Overview eee 3 4 Hazard Warning Flashers ccecce 3 6 OMe etedecashcieite sd EE A ED EEN RER 3 6 THE WHC cities redde anner 3 6 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 2 3 7 Turn and Lane Change Signals 0e 3 7 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 3 8 Flash to Passiin atoa Helse bred 3 8 Windshield Wipers cceeceeeeeereeeeeeeeeees 3 8 Windshield Washer orale 3 9 Rear Window Wiper Washet cecce 3 9 Headlamp Washer eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 10 Cruise Control ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeanenes 3 10 FIO AGIAN PS oponendi aan eion 3 13 Headlamps on Reminder seeeeeeeeeeees 3 14 Daytime Running Lamps DRL n a 3 14 Automatic Headlamp System 3 14 FOG LAMPS i ncnicanctsaccat ter e ea sender saan 3 15 Instrument Panel Brightness c eee 3 16 Dome Lamps snein E NS 3 16 Dome Lamp Override ceeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 3 16 Entry Lighting esineisiin 3 16 Instrument Panel EXIT LIMUN resres aa 3 17 Reading Lamps cccticsccusei teed dress sinies nin 3 17 Electric Power Management eeeeeee ee 3 17 Battery Run Down Protection eee 3 18 Accessory Power Outlet S W W u d dc ss seeren 3 18 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 00 3 19 Climate Controls eener 3 19 Dual Climate Control System eeeeeeee 3 19 Dual Automatic Climate Contro
448. umper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in P Park or a manual transmission in N Neutral before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is not in Neutral 5 39 Notice If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets if equipped Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help to save both batteries And it could save the radio 4 Open both hoods and locate the batteries Find the positive and negative terminals on each battery Your vehicle has a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use this remote terminal instead of the terminal on the battery The remote negative terminal is located on the front en
449. urn to the booster seat Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 27 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip If yes continue If no return to the booster seat If you have the choice a child should sit in a position with a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 27 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant rest
450. vement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches 8 to 13 cm about one eighth turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing Passing another vehicle on a two lane road can be dangerous To reduce the risk of danger while passing Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait e Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection Never cross a solid or double solid line on your side of the lane Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Doing so can reduce your visibility Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle e When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to exist
451. ving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool 5 31 If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle Climbs a long hill on a hot day Stops after high speed driving Idles for long periods in traffic Tows a trailer If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam 1 Turn the air conditioning off 2 Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed Open the windows as necessary 3 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in N Neutral while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to P Park or N Neutral and let the engine idle If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays the vehicle can be driven Continue to drive 5 32 the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you If the warning does not come back on continue to drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while parked If the warning is still disp
452. w signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the transmission in P Park for a few minutes before turning the engine off If the overheat warning comes on see Engine Overheating on page 5 30 Parking on Hills ACAUTION Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous If something goes wrong the rig could start to move People can be injured and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged When possible always park the rig on a flat surface If parking the rig on a hill 1 Press the brake pedal but do not shift into P Park yet Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the brake pedal Then apply the parking brake and shift into P Park 5 Release the brake pedal A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If the engine has been left running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when on fairly level ground use the steps that follow Always put the shift lever fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set I
453. well Be sure the underbody mounted spare tire is stored with its valve stem pointing up Notice An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always be stored under the vehicle with the hoist However storing it that way for an extended period could damage the wheel To avoid this always stow the wheel properly with the valve stem pointing up and have the wheel repaired as soon as possible Follow this diagram to store the underbody mounted flat or spare tire KR Wheel Wrench Hoist Shaft Extension Retainer Spare or Flat Tire Valve Stem Pointed Up Put the tire E on the ground at the rear of the vehicle Remove the hubcap if the vehicle has one from the flat tire by tapping the backside of the hubcap with the wheel wrench A Store in a safe location until the flat tire is repaired Once the tire is repaired replace the hubcap Make sure the valve stem is pointed up and to the rear Pull the retainer D through the wheel Put the socket end of the extension C through the hole just above the rear bumper at a 45 degree angle downward Connect the socket end of the extension to the hoist shaft B 6 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle Continue turning the wheel wrench A clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice This indicates that the tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened Make sur
454. while the fog lamps are on Fog lamps turn off whenever the high beam headlamps are on Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps 3 15 Instrument Panel Brightness Press the knob located next to the exterior lamps knob to extend it Turn the knob to adjust the instrument panel lights Turn the knob all the way up to turn on the interior lamps Press the knob back into its stored position when you are not using it Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when a door is opened unless the dome lamp override button is pressed in Dome Lamp Override The dome override button is located below the exterior lamps knob p Press to turn the dome lamps off The dome lamps will remain off when a door is open This overrides the illuminated entry feature unless the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle Press the button again to return the lamps to automatic operation The dome lamps will come on when a door is opened Entry Lighting The vehicle has entry lighting When any door is opened the dome lamps come on as long as the dome override lamp override button is not pressed in When all the doors are closed the lamps stay on for a short period of time and then turn off automatically If you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the vehicle the interior lamps come on for a short time whether or not the dome lamp override is on
455. xhaust system even though they have corrosion protection 5 110 At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this we will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN w SAMPLE4UX1M072675 This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle The VIN also appears on the Certification Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code helps identify the vehicle s engine specifications and replacement p
456. ximum trailer weight 4 47 Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for the vehicle Max Trailer Wt GCWR 5 300 Ibs 2 404 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 536 kg 2WD Envoy 4 2 L L6 Engine 5 800 Ibs 2 631 kg 10 500 Ibs 4 763 kg 6 300 Ibs 2 858 kg 11 000 Ibs 4 990 kg 6 100 Ibs 2 767 kg 11 000 Ibs 4 990 kg 2WD Envoy edt Ve Engine 6 600 lbs 2 994 ko 11 500 Ibs 5 216 kg 5 200 Ibs 2 359 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 536 kg 4WD Envoy 4 2 L L6 Engine 5 700 Ibs 2 858 kg 10 500 Ibs 4 763 kg 6 200 Ibs 2 812 kg 11 000 Ibs 4 990 kg 4WD Envoy 5 3 L V8 Engine 3 42 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg 11 000 Ibs 4 990 kg 6 500 Ibs 2 948 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 216 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversion The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 6 for more information 4 48 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo carried in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If there are a lot of options equipment passengers or ca
457. xtra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages the front axle to help drive the vehicle 2 29 4 Four Wheel Low This setting also engages the front axle and delivers extra torque It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose this setting if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud and climbing or descending steep hills A CAUTION Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in Neutral See Parking Brake on page 2 33 Neutral Shift the vehicle s transfer case to Neutral only when towing the vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4 38 for more information 2 30 An indicator light in the knob will show you which position the transfer case is in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case It will stay on when the shift is complete If the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting If the service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light on the instrument panel cluster stays on you should take the vehicle to your deale
458. y 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the track into memory When SONG LIST is pressed one beep sounds After two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button two beeps sound to confirm the track has been saved 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections 3 77 S LIST FULL displays if more than 20 selections are saved To play the song list press the SONG LIST button One beep sounds and S LIST displays The recorded tracks begin to play in the order they were saved Seek through the song list by using either SEEK or TYPE arrow Seeking past the last saved track returns to the first saved track To delete tracks from the song list 1 Turn the CD player on 2 Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on S LIST displays 3 Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the desired track to be deleted 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two seconds When SONG LIST is pressed one beep sounds After two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button two beeps sound to confirm that the track has been deleted After a track has been deleted the remaining tracks are moved up the list When another track is added to the song list the track is added to the end of the list 3 78 To delete the entire song list 1 Turn the CD player on 2 Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on S LIST displays 3 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more than four seconds One
459. y the system will maintain full cylinder operation Automatic Transmission Operation There are several different positions for the gear shift lever 2 25 P Park This position locks the rear wheels It is the best position to use when you start the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily A CAUTION It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into Park on page 2 34 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 46 2 26 A CAUTION If you have four wheel drive the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park if the transfer case is in Neutral So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in Neutral See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 28 See Shifting Into Park on page 2 34 Make sure the shift lever is fully in P Park before starting the engine The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply the brake pedal then press the shift lever button before you can shift from P Park w
460. y run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging The recirculation button cannot be selected while in defrost mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off An indicator light comes on and the system begins to cool and dehumidify the air inside of the vehicle You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again This is normal LE Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on An indicator light comes to show that the recirculation is on This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle The air conditioning compressor will also come on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase fan speed Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window QW Rear Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light in the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on The rear window defogger automatically turns off approximately ten minutes after the button is pressed For vehicles with heated mirrors they turn on when the rear window defogger bu

2009 GMC Envoy Owners Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents